S71WS512ND0BFWE31 [SPANSION]

Memory Circuit, 32MX16, CMOS, PBGA84, 9 X 12 MM, 1.20 MM HEIGHT, LEAD FREE, FBGA-84;
S71WS512ND0BFWE31
型号: S71WS512ND0BFWE31
厂家: SPANSION    SPANSION
描述:

Memory Circuit, 32MX16, CMOS, PBGA84, 9 X 12 MM, 1.20 MM HEIGHT, LEAD FREE, FBGA-84

静态存储器 内存集成电路
文件: 总144页 (文件大小:3335K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0 Based MCPs  
Stacked Multi-chip Product (MCP)  
256/512 Megabit (32M/16M x 16 bit) CMOS  
1.8 Volt-only Simultaneous Read/Write,  
Burst-mode Flash Memory with  
128 Megabit (8M x 16-Bit) pSRAM Type 4  
ADVANCE  
INFORMATION  
Distinctive Characteristics  
MCP Features  
„Power supply voltage of 1.7 to 1.95V  
„Burst Speed: 54MHz  
„Packages: 8 x 11.6 mm, 9 x 12 mm  
„Operating Temperature  
„-25°C to +85°C  
„-40°C to +85°C  
General Description  
The S71WS Series is a product line of stacked Multi-chip Product (MCP) packages  
and consists of  
„One or more flash memory die  
„pSRAM Type 4—Compatible pSRAM  
The products covered by this document are listed in the table below. For details  
about their specifications, please refer to the individual constituent datasheet for  
further details.  
Flash Density  
512Mb  
256Mb  
128Mb  
64Mb  
128Mb  
64Mb  
32Mb  
S71WS512ND0  
S71WS256ND0  
16Mb  
Publication Number S71WS512/256Nx0_UT Revision A Amendment 0 Issue Date November 8, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Table 5.30. Unlock Bypass Entry .......................................... 43  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0 Based MCPs  
Table 5.31. Unlock Bypass Program ..................................... 44  
Table 5.32. Unlock Bypass Reset ......................................... 44  
Figure 5.33. Write Operation Status Flowchart....................... 46  
Table 5.34. DQ6 and DQ2 Indications ................................... 48  
Table 5.35. Write Operation Status ...................................... 49  
Table 5.36. Reset .............................................................. 51  
Figure 6.2. Lock Register Program Algorithm......................... 57  
Table 8.2. SecSi Sector Entry .............................................. 63  
Table 8.3. SecSi Sector Program .......................................... 64  
Table 8.4. SecSi Sector Entry .............................................. 64  
Figure 9.2. Maximum Positive Overshoot Waveform............... 65  
Figure 9.3. Test Setup........................................................ 66  
Figure 9.4. Input Waveforms and Measurement Levels........... 67  
Figure 9.5. VCC Power-up Diagram....................................... 67  
Figure 9.6. CLK Characterization.......................................... 69  
Figure 9.7. CLK Synchronous Burst Mode Read...................... 71  
Figure 9.8. 8-word Linear Burst with Wrap Around................. 72  
Figure 9.9. 8-word Linear Burst without Wrap Around ............ 72  
Figure 9.10. Linear Burst with RDY Set One Cycle Before Data 73  
Figure 9.11. Asynchronous Mode Read ................................. 74  
Figure 9.12. Reset Timings ................................................. 75  
Figure 9.2. Chip/Sector Erase Operation Timings: WE# Latched  
Addresses......................................................................... 77  
Figure 9.13. Asynchronous Program Operation Timings: WE#  
Latched Addresses............................................................. 78  
Figure 9.14. Synchronous Program Operation Timings:  
CLK Latched Addresses ...................................................... 79  
Figure 9.15. Accelerated Unlock Bypass Programming Timing.. 80  
Figure 9.16. Data# Polling Timings  
(During Embedded Algorithm)............................................. 80  
Figure 9.17. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithm) 81  
Figure 9.18. Synchronous Data Polling  
Timings/Toggle Bit Timings................................................. 81  
Figure 9.19. DQ2 vs. DQ6................................................... 82  
Figure 9.20. Latency with Boundary Crossing when  
Frequency > 66 MHz.......................................................... 82  
Figure 9.21. Latency with Boundary Crossing into Program/  
Erase Bank....................................................................... 83  
Figure 9.22. Example of Wait States Insertion....................... 84  
Figure 9.23. Back-to-Back Read/Write Cycle Timings.............. 85  
Table 10.2. Sector Protection Commands .............................. 90  
Table 10.3. CFI Query Identification String ............................ 91  
Table 10.4. System Interface String ..................................... 92  
Table 10.5. Device Geometry Definition ................................ 92  
Table 10.6. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query ............. 93  
Distinctive Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
MCP Features ................................................................................................... 1  
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
bProduct Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
MCP Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Type 4 - based Pinout ..........................................................................................7  
MCP Look-ahead Connection Diagram .........................................................8  
Input/Output Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Valid Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
256Mb - WS256N Flash + 128 pSRAM .......................................................... 11  
2x256Mb—WS256N Flash + 128Mb pSRAM ............................................... 11  
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
FEA084—84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array (FBGA) 12.0 x 9.0 mm MCP  
Compatible Package ........................................................................................... 12  
TSD084—84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array (FBGA) 12.0 x 9.0 mm MCP  
Compatible Package ............................................................................................13  
TLA084—84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array (FBGA) 11.6x8.0x1.2 mm  
MCP Compatible Package ................................................................................14  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family  
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Application Notes ...........................................................................................18  
Specification Bulletins ....................................................................................18  
Drivers and Software Support .................................................................... 18  
CAD Modeling Support ................................................................................18  
Technical Support ...........................................................................................18  
Spansion LLC Locations ........................................................18  
Table 4.2. S29WS128N Sector & Memory Address Map .......... 20  
Table 4.3. S29WS064N Sector & Memory Address Map .......... 21  
Table 5.4. Device Operations .............................................. 22  
Table 5.7. Address Latency for 5 Wait States (  
Table 5.8. Address Latency for 4 Wait States (  
Table 5.9. Address Latency for 3 Wait States (  
68 MHz) ........ 24  
54 MHz) ........ 25  
40 MHz) ........ 25  
Table 5.10. Address/Boundary Crossing Latency for 6 Wait States  
80 MHz) ....................................................................... 25  
Table 5.11. Address/Boundary Crossing Latency for 5 Wait States  
68 MHz) ....................................................................... 25  
Table 5.12. Address/Boundary Crossing Latency for 4 Wait States  
54 MHz) ....................................................................... 25  
Table 5.13. Address/Boundary Crossing Latency for 3 Wait States  
40 MHz) ....................................................................... 25  
(≤  
(≤  
(≤  
pSRAM Type 4  
(≤  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Pin Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Timing Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Power Up ............................................................................................................100  
Figure 11.24. Power Up Timing.......................................... 100  
Standby Mode .................................................................................................... 100  
Figure 11.25. Standby Mode State Machines ....................... 100  
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Table 11.7. Asynchronous 4 Page Read & Asynchronous Write Mode  
(A15/A14=0/0) ............................................................... 101  
Table 11.8. Synchronous Burst Read & Asynchronous Write Mode  
(A15/A14=0/1) ............................................................... 102  
Table 11.9. Synchronous Burst Read & Synchronous Burst Write  
Mode(A15/A14=1/0) ........................................................ 103  
Figure 5.2. Synchronous Read ............................................. 26  
Table 5.14. Burst Address Groups ....................................... 27  
Table 5.15. Configuration Register ....................................... 28  
Table 5.16. Autoselect Addresses ........................................ 29  
Table 5.17. Autoselect Entry ............................................... 29  
Table 5.18. Autoselect Exit ................................................. 30  
Figure 5.19. Single Word Program........................................ 32  
Table 5.20. Single Word Program ........................................ 33  
Table 5.21. Write Buffer Program ........................................ 35  
Figure 5.22. Write Buffer Programming Operation .................. 36  
Table 5.23. Sector Erase .................................................... 38  
Figure 5.24. Sector Erase Operation ..................................... 39  
Table 5.25. Chip Erase ....................................................... 40  
Table 5.26. Erase Suspend ................................................. 41  
Table 5.27. Erase Resume .................................................. 41  
Table 5.28. Program Suspend ............................................. 42  
Table 5.29. Program Resume .............................................. 42  
Mode Register Setting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
November 8, 2004 S71WS512/256Nx0_UTA0  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
2
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
Figure 11.39. Timing Waveform Of Write Cycle (Address Latch  
Type)............................................................................. 121  
Table 11.21. Asynchronous Write in Synchronous Mode AC  
Characteristics ................................................................ 121  
Asynchronous Write Timing Waveform in Synchronous Mode ........122  
Mode Register Set (MRS) ...............................................................................104  
Table 11.10. Mode Register Setting According to  
Field of Function ...............................................................104  
Table 11.11. Mode Register Set ..........................................104  
MRS Pin Control Type Mode Register Setting Timing ..........................105  
Figure 11.26. Mode Register Setting Timing (OE# = VIH) ...... 106  
Table 11.12. MRS AC Characteristics ...................................106  
Write Cycle (Low ADV# Type) ...............................................................122  
Figure 11.40. Timing Waveform Of Write  
Cycle (Low ADV# Type).................................................... 122  
Table 11.22. Asynchronous Write in Synchronous Mode AC  
Characteristics ................................................................ 122  
Write Cycle (Low ADV# Type) ...............................................................123  
Figure 11.41. Timing Waveform Of Write Cycle  
(Low ADV# Type)............................................................ 123  
Table 11.23. Asynchronous Write in Synchronous Mode AC  
Characteristics ................................................................ 123  
Multiple Write Cycle (Low ADV# Type) ..............................................124  
Figure 11.42. Timing Waveform Of Multiple Write Cycle (Low ADV#  
Type)............................................................................. 124  
Table 11.24. Asynchronous Write in Synchronous Mode AC  
Characteristics ................................................................ 125  
Asynchronous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Asynchronous 4 Page Read Operation ......................................................107  
Asynchronous Write Operation ..................................................................107  
Asynchronous Write Operation in Synchronous Mode .......................107  
Figure 11.27. Asynchronous 4-Page Read............................ 107  
Figure 11.28. Asynchronous Write...................................... 107  
Synchronous Burst Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Synchronous Burst Read Operation ...........................................................108  
Synchronous Burst Write Operation .........................................................108  
Figure 11.29. Synchronous Burst Read................................ 108  
Figure 11.30. Synchronous Burst Write............................... 109  
Synchronous Burst Operation Terminology . . 109  
Clock (CLK) ........................................................................................................109  
Latency Count ....................................................................................................109  
Table 11.13. Latency Count Support ...................................109  
Table 11.14. Number of CLocks for 1st Data ........................109  
Figure 11.31. Latency Configuration (Read)......................... 110  
Burst Length ........................................................................................................110  
Burst Stop .............................................................................................................110  
Synchronous Burst Operation Terminology . . . 110  
Wait Control (WAIT#) ...................................................................................110  
Figure 11.32. WAIT# and Read/Write Latency Control........... 111  
Burst Type .............................................................................................................111  
Table 11.15. Burst Sequence .............................................111  
AC Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Test Conditions (Test Load and Test Input/Output Reference) ........126  
Figure 11.43. AC Output Load Circuit ................................. 126  
Table 11.25. Synchronous AC Characteristics ..................... 127  
Synchronous Burst Operation  
Timing Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Figure 11.44. Timing Waveform Of Basic Burst Operation ..... 128  
Table 11.26. Burst Operation AC Characteristics .................. 128  
Synchronous Burst Read Timing Waveform . . . 129  
Read Timings .......................................................................................................129  
Figure 11.45. Timing Waveform of Burst Read Cycle (1)....... 129  
Table 11.27. Burst Read AC Characteristics ......................... 130  
Figure 11.46. Timing Waveform of Burst Read Cycle (2)....... 130  
Table 11.28. Burst Read AC Characteristics ......................... 131  
Figure 11.47. Timing Waveform of Burst Read Cycle (3)....... 131  
Table 11.29. Burst Read AC Characteristics ......................... 132  
Write Timings .....................................................................................................133  
Figure 11.48. Timing Waveform of Burst Write Cycle (1)....... 133  
Table 11.30. Burst Write AC Characteristics ........................ 134  
Figure 11.49. Timing Waveform of Burst Write Cycle (2)....... 135  
Table 11.31. Burst Write AC Characteristics ........................ 135  
Low Power Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Internal TCSR ......................................................................................................112  
Figure 11.33. PAR Mode Execution and Exit ......................... 112  
Table 11.16. PAR Mode Characteristics ................................112  
Driver Strength Optimization ........................................................................112  
Partial Array Refresh (PAR) mode ...............................................................112  
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
DC Recommended Operating Conditions . . . . . 113  
Capacitance (Ta = 25°C, f = 1 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . 113  
DC and Operating Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Common ...............................................................................................................114  
Synchronous Burst Read Stop  
Timing Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Figure 11.50. Timing Waveform of Burst Read Stop by CS#.. 136  
Table 11.32. Burst Read Stop AC Characteristics ................. 136  
AC Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Test Conditions (Test Load and Test Input/Output Reference) ........ 115  
Figure 11.34. Output Load................................................. 115  
Asynchronous AC Characteristics ...............................................................116  
Synchronous Burst Write Stop  
Timing Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Figure 11.51. Timing Waveform of Burst Write Stop by CS#.. 137  
Table 11.33. Burst Write Stop AC Characteristics ................. 137  
Timing Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Asynchronous Read Timing Waveform ...................................................... 117  
Figure 11.35. Timing Waveform Of Asynchronous Read Cycle 117  
Table 11.17. Asynchronous Read AC Characteristics .............117  
Page Read .........................................................................................................118  
Figure 11.36. Timing Waveform Of Page Read Cycle............. 118  
Table 11.18. Asynchronous Page Read AC Characteristics ......118  
Asynchronous Write Timing Waveform ....................................................119  
Figure 11.37. Timing Waveform Of Write Cycle .................... 119  
Table 11.19. Asynchronous Write AC Characteristics .............119  
Write Cycle 2 ................................................................................................120  
Figure 11.38. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle(2)................. 120  
Table 11.20. Asynchronous Write AC Characteristics (UB# & LB#  
Controlled) ......................................................................120  
Write Cycle (Address Latch Type) ..........................................................121  
Synchronous Burst Read Suspend Timing  
Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Figure 11.52. Timing Waveform of Burst  
Read Suspend Cycle (1) ................................................... 138  
Table 11.34. Burst Read Suspend AC Characteristics ............ 138  
Transition Timing Waveform Between Read And  
Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Figure 11.53. Synchronous Burst Read to Asynchronous Write  
(Address Latch Type)....................................................... 139  
Table 11.35. Burst Read to Asynchronous Write (Address Latch  
Type) AC Characteristics ................................................... 139  
Figure 11.54. Synchronous Burst Read to Asynchronous Write (Low  
ADV# Type).................................................................... 140  
Table 11.36. Burst Read to Asynchronous Write (Low ADV# Type)  
3
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
S71WS512/256Nx0_UTA0 November 8, 2004  
A d v a n c e I n f o r m a t i o n  
AC Characteristics ............................................................140  
Timing ........................................................................... 143  
Table 11.39. Asynchronous Write (Low ADV# Type) to Burst Read  
AC Characteristics ............................................................ 143  
Figure 11.58. Synchronous Burst Write to Synchronous Burst Read  
Timing ........................................................................... 144  
Table 11.40. Asynchronous Write (Low ADV# Type) to Burst Read  
AC Characteristics ............................................................ 144  
Figure 11.55. Asynchronous Write (Address Latch Type) to  
Synchronous Burst Read Timing......................................... 141  
Table 11.37. Asynchronous Write (Address Latch Type) to Burst  
Read AC Characteristics ....................................................141  
Figure 11.56. Asynchronous Write (Low ADV# Type) to  
Synchronous Burst Read Timing......................................... 142  
Table 11.38. Asynchronous Write (Low ADV# Type) to Burst Read  
AC Characteristics ............................................................142  
Figure 11.57. Synchronous Burst Read to Synchronous Burst Write  
Revision Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
November 8, 2004 S71WS512/256Nx0_UTA0  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
4
Product Selector Guide  
WS256N + 128 pSRAM  
pSRAM Flash Speed  
pSRAM  
Device-Model  
density  
MHz  
speed MHz  
DYB Bits - Power Up  
0 (Protected)  
Supplier  
Package  
S71WS256ND0-E3  
S71WS256ND0-E7  
TSD084  
9x12x1.2  
128M  
54  
54  
Type 4  
1 (Unprotected [Default state])  
WS512N + 128 pSRAM  
pSRAM  
speed  
MHz  
pSRAM Flash Speed  
Device-Model  
density  
MHz  
DYB Bits - Power Up  
Supplier  
Package  
S71WS512ND0-Y3  
S71WS512ND0-Y7  
0
1
1.8V RAM  
Type 4  
FEA084  
9x12x1.4  
128Mb  
54  
54  
November 8, 2004 S71WS512/256Nx0_UT  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
5
MCP Block Diagram  
F-VCC  
Flash-only Address  
Shared Address  
V
V
ID  
CC  
DQ15 to DQ0  
CLK  
WP#  
22  
16  
DQ15 to DQ0  
CLK  
WP#  
ACC  
ACC  
CE#  
OE#  
Flash 1  
(Note 3) F1-CE#  
OE#  
Flash 2  
(Note 4)  
WE#  
F-RST#  
AVD#  
WE#  
RESET#  
AVD#  
RDY  
RDY  
(Note 3) F2-CE#  
R-VCC  
V
SS  
22  
V
CCQ  
V
CC  
16  
I/O15 to I/O0  
CLK  
R-CE1#  
CE#  
WE#  
OE#  
pSRAM  
WAIT#  
R-UB#  
R-LB#  
UB#  
LB#  
V
SSQ  
AVD#  
MRS  
R-MRS  
Notes:  
1. For 1 Flash + pSRAM, F1-CE# = CE#. For 2 Flash + pSRAM, CE# = F1-CE# and F2-CE# is the chip-enable pin for the second Flash.  
2. Only needed for S71WS512N.  
3. For the 128M pSRAM devices, there are 23 shared addresses.  
6
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
S71WS512/256Nx0_UT November 8, 2004  
Connection Diagrams  
Type 4 - based Pinout  
84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array  
Type 4-based Pinout (Top View, Balls Facing Down)  
A10  
A1  
DNU  
DNU  
B2  
B3  
RFU  
C3  
A7  
D3  
A6  
E3  
B4  
CLK  
C4  
B5  
F2-CE#  
C5  
B6  
RFU  
C6  
B7  
RFU  
C7  
B8  
RFU  
C8  
B9  
RFU  
C9  
AVD#  
C2  
F-WP#  
D2  
Legend  
RFU  
D9  
R-LB#  
D4  
F-ACC  
D5  
WE#  
D6  
A8  
A11  
D8  
D7  
Shared  
A3  
R-UB# F-RST#  
RFU  
E6  
A19  
E7  
A12  
E8  
A15  
E9  
E2  
E4  
A18  
F4  
E5  
RDY  
F5  
Flash XIP only  
A2  
F2  
A1  
G2  
A0  
A5  
F3  
A20  
F6  
A9  
A13  
F8  
A21  
F9  
F7  
RAM only  
A4  
A17  
G4  
A10  
G7  
A14  
G8  
A22  
G9  
RFU  
G5  
A23  
G6  
G3  
1st Flash  
Only  
VSS  
DQ1  
RFU  
RFU  
DQ6  
RFU  
A16  
H2  
H3  
H4  
H5  
H6  
H7  
H8  
H9  
F1-CE#  
OE#  
DQ9  
DQ3  
DQ4  
DQ13  
DQ15  
R-MRS  
2nd Flash  
Only  
J9  
J2  
J3  
J4  
DQ10  
K4  
J5  
J6  
J7  
J8  
R-CE1#  
DQ0  
F-VCC  
R-VCC  
DQ12  
DQ7  
VSS  
K2  
K8  
K3  
K5  
K7  
K6  
RFU  
L6  
K9  
RFU  
L9  
Reserved for  
Future Use  
DQ2  
DQ5  
DQ14  
DQ8  
DQ11  
RFU  
L3  
L4  
L5  
L7  
L8  
L2  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
F-VCC  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
RFU  
M10  
DNU  
M1  
DNU  
Notes:  
1. In MCP's based on a single S29WS256N (S71WS256N), ball B5 is RFU. In MCP's based on two  
S29WS256N (S71WS512), ball B5 is or F2-CE#.  
2. Addresses are shared between Flash and RAM depending on the density of the pSRAM.  
MCP  
Flash-only Addresses  
Shared Addresses  
A21-A0  
S71WS256NC0  
S71WS512ND0  
A23-A22  
A23  
A22-A0  
November 8, 2004 S71WS512/256Nx0_UT  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
7
MCP Look-ahead Connection Diagram  
96-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array  
(Top View, Balls Facing Down)  
Legend:  
A2  
A10  
A9  
A1  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
(Do Not Use)  
DNU  
B1  
B9  
B2  
B10  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
Code Flash Only  
pSRAM Only  
C4  
C5  
C6  
C7  
C8  
C9  
C2  
C3  
AVD#  
VSS  
CLK  
F2-CE#  
F-VCC  
F-CLK#  
R-OE# F2-OE#  
D4  
D2  
D3  
A7  
D5  
D6  
D7  
A8  
D8  
D9  
D-DM0/  
D1, D#  
See Table  
See Table WE#  
E5 E6  
F-RST# R1-CE2  
A11  
F3-CE#  
E2  
A3  
E3  
A6  
E4  
E7  
E8  
E9  
Flash/xRAM  
Shared  
D-DM1/  
D11, D#  
A19  
A12  
A15  
F2  
A2  
F3  
A5  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
A9  
F8  
F9  
A18 See Table  
A20  
A13  
A21  
MirrorBit Data  
Only  
G6  
G8  
G2  
A1  
G4  
G7  
G9  
G3  
A4  
G5  
A17  
R2-CE1  
A23  
A10  
A14  
A22  
xRAM Shared  
H2  
A0  
H3  
H4  
H5  
H6  
H7  
H8  
H9  
VSS  
DQ1  
R2-VCC R2-CE2  
DQ6  
A24  
A16  
Flash/Data  
Shared  
J2  
J3  
J4  
J5  
J6  
J7  
J8  
J9  
DQ9  
DQ3  
DQ4  
DQ13  
DQ15  
R-CRE  
F1-CE#  
OE#  
K2  
K5  
K3  
K4  
K6  
K7  
K8  
K9  
DQ12  
VSS  
R1-CE1#  
DQ0  
DQ10  
F-VCC  
R1-VCC  
DQ7  
L2  
L9  
L4  
L5  
L6  
L7  
L8  
L3  
DQ2  
DQ11  
A25  
DQ5  
DQ14  
F-WP#  
R-VCC  
DQ8  
DNU  
M5  
M2  
M3  
M4  
M6  
M7  
M8  
M9  
A27  
A26  
VSS  
F-VCC  
F4-CE# R-VCCQ F-VCCQ  
DNU  
N1  
N2  
N10  
N9  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
P1  
P2  
P10  
P9  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
DNU  
Table  
BALL  
1.8V  
Vcc  
3.0V  
Vcc  
FASL Standard  
MCP Packages  
D2  
NC  
F-WP#  
ACC  
7.0 x 9.0mm  
8.0 x 11.6mm  
9.0 x 12.0mm  
11.0 x 13.0mm  
WP#/  
ACC  
D5  
F5  
RY/  
BY#  
F-RDY/  
R-WAIT#  
Notes:  
1. In a 3.0V system, the GL device used as Data has to have WP tied to VCC.  
2. F1 and F2 denote XIP/Flash, F3 and F4 denote Data/Companion Flash.  
8
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
S71WS512/256Nx0_UT November 8, 2004  
Input/Output Descriptions  
A23-A0  
DQ15-DQ0  
OE#  
=
=
=
Address inputs  
Data input/output  
Output Enable input. Asynchronous relative to CLK  
for the Burst mode.  
WE#  
=
=
=
=
Write Enable input.  
Ground  
V
SS  
NC  
RDY  
No Connect; not connected internally  
Ready output. Indicates the status of the Burst read.  
The WAIT# pin of the pSRAM is tied to RDY.  
CLK  
=
Clock input. In burst mode, after the initial word is  
output, subsequent active edges of CLK increment  
the internal address counter. Should be at V or V  
IL  
IH  
while in asynchronous mode  
AVD#  
=
Address Valid input. Indicates to device that the  
valid address is present on the address inputs.  
Low = for asynchronous mode, indicates valid  
address; for burst mode, causes starting address to  
be latched.  
High = device ignores address inputs  
F-RST#  
F-WP#  
=
=
Hardware reset input. Low = device resets and  
returns to reading array data  
Hardware write protect input. At V , disables  
IL  
program and erase functions in the four outermost  
sectors. Should be at V for all other conditions.  
IH  
F-ACC  
=
Accelerated input. At V , accelerates  
HH  
programming; automatically places device in unlock  
bypass mode. At V , disables all program and erase  
IL  
functions. Should be at V for all other conditions.  
IH  
R-CE1#  
F1-CE#  
=
=
Chip-enable input for pSRAM.  
Chip-enable input for Flash 1. Asynchronous relative  
to CLK for Burst Mode.  
F2-CE#  
=
Chip-enable input for Flash 2. Asynchronous relative  
to CLK for Burst Mode. This applies to the 512Mb  
MCP only.  
R-MRS  
F-VCC  
R-VCC  
R-UB#  
R-LB#  
DNU  
=
=
=
=
=
=
Mode register select for Type 4.  
Flash 1.8 Volt-only single power supply.  
pSRAM Power Supply.  
Upper Byte Control (pSRAM).  
Lower Byte Control (pSRAM).  
Do Not Use.  
November 8, 2004 S71WS512/256Nx0_UT  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
9
Ordering Information  
The order number (Valid Combination) is formed by the following:  
S71WS 256  
N
D
0
BA  
W
A
3
0
PACKING TYPE  
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
Tray  
Tube  
7” Tape and Reel  
13” Tape and Reel  
SUPPLIER, DYB, SPEED COMBINATION  
3
7
=
=
RAM Type 4, 0, 54MHz  
RAM Type 4, 1, 54MHz  
PACKAGE MODIFIER  
A
Y
E
=
=
=
1.2mm, 8 x 11.6, 84-ball FBGA  
1.4mm, 9 x 12, 84-ball FBGA  
1.2mm, 9 x 12, 84-ball FBGA  
TEMPERATURE RANGE  
W
I
=
=
Wireless (-25  
Industrial (–40  
°
C to +85  
°
C)  
C)  
°C to +85  
°
PACKAGE TYPE  
BA  
=
Very Thin Fine-Pitch BGA  
Lead (Pb)-free Compliant Package  
Very Thin Fine-Pitch BGA  
Lead (Pb)-free Package  
BF  
=
CHIP CONTENTS—2  
No second content  
CHIP CONTENTS—1  
C = 64Mb  
D = 128Mb  
PROCESS TECHNOLOGY  
N
=
110nm MirrorBit™ Technology  
FLASH DENSITY  
512  
256  
=
=
512Mb (2x256Mb)  
256Mb  
DEVICE FAMILY  
S71WS= Multi-Chip Product  
1.8 Volt-only Simultaneous Read/Write Burst Mode  
Flash Memory + xRAM  
10  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
S71WS512/256Nx0_UT November 8, 2004  
Valid Combinations  
256Mb - WS256N Flash + 128 pSRAM  
Temperature  
Range °C  
Burst  
Speed  
Material  
Set  
Order Number  
Package Marking  
DYB Power-up State  
Supplier  
S71WS256ND0BAWE3  
71WS256ND0BAWE3  
0(Protected)  
1.8V RAM  
Type 4  
-25° to +85°C  
1(Unprotected[Default  
State])  
S71WS256ND0BAWE7  
S71WS256ND0BAIE3  
S71WS256ND0BAIE7  
S71WS256ND0BFWE3  
S71WS256ND0BFWE7  
S71WS256ND0BFIE3  
S71WS256ND0BFIE7  
71WS256ND0BAWE7  
71WS256ND0BAIE3  
71WS256ND0BAIE7  
71WS256ND0BFWE3  
71WS256ND0BFWE7  
71WS256ND0BFIE3  
71WS256ND0BFIE7  
Pb-free  
compliant  
0(Sectors Protected)  
1.8V RAM  
Type 4  
-40° to +85°C  
-25° to +85°C  
-40° to +85°C  
1(Unprotected[Default  
State])  
54MHz  
0(Protected)  
1.8V RAM  
Type 4  
1(Unprotected[Default  
State])  
Pb-free  
0(Protected)  
1.8V RAM  
Type 4  
1(Unprotected[Default  
State])  
2x256Mb—WS256N Flash + 128Mb pSRAM  
Te m p e r a t u re  
Range °C  
Burst  
Speed  
Material  
Set  
Order Number  
Package Marking  
DYB Power-up State  
Supplier  
S71WS512ND0BAWE3  
71WS512ND0BAWE3  
0(Protected)  
1.8V RAM  
Type 4  
-25° to +85°C  
-40° to +85°C  
1(Unprotected [Default  
State])  
S71WS512ND0BAWE7  
S71WS512ND0BAIE3  
S71WS512ND0BAIE7  
S71WS512ND0BFWE3  
S71WS512ND0BFWE7  
71WS512ND0BAWE7  
71WS512ND0BAIE3  
71WS512ND0BAIE7  
71WS512ND0BFWE3  
71WS512ND0BFWE7  
Pb-free  
compliant  
0(Protected)  
1.8V RAM  
Type 4  
1(Unprotected [Default  
State])  
54MHz  
0(Protected)  
1.8V RAM  
Type 4  
-25° to +85°C  
-40° to +85°C  
1(Unprotected [Default  
State])  
Pb-free  
S71WS512ND0BFIE3  
S71WS512ND0BFIE7  
71WS512ND0BFIE3  
71WS512ND0BFIE7  
0(Protected)  
0(Protected)  
1.8V RAM  
Type 4  
November 8, 2004 S71WS512/256Nx0_UT  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
11  
Physical Dimensions  
FEA084—84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array (FBGA) 12.0 x 9.0 mm MCP  
Compatible Package  
A
D1  
D
eD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
10  
9
8
SE  
7
7
6
E
B
E1  
5
4
3
2
1
eE  
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
M
L K  
INDEX MARK  
10  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
7
SD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
TOP VIEW  
BOTTOM VIEW  
0.20  
C
C
A2  
A
0.08  
C
A1  
SIDE VIEW  
6
84X  
0.15  
b
M
C
C
A B  
0.08  
M
NOTES:  
PACKAGE  
JEDEC  
FEA 084  
N/A  
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER  
ASME Y14.5M-1994.  
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
D x E  
12.00 mm x 9.00 mm  
PACKAGE  
NOTE  
3. BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JESD 95-1, SPP-010.  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
---  
NOM  
---  
MAX  
4.  
e REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.  
A
A1  
1.40  
---  
PROFILE  
5. SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D"  
DIRECTION.  
0.10  
1.11  
---  
BALL HEIGHT  
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE  
"E" DIRECTION.  
A2  
---  
1.26  
BODY THICKNESS  
BODY SIZE  
D
12.00 BSC.  
9.00 BSC.  
8.80 BSC.  
7.20 BSC.  
12  
n IS THE NUMBER OF POPULTED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS  
FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.  
E
BODY SIZE  
D1  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
6
7
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL  
DIAMETER IN A PLANE PARALLEL TO DATUM C.  
E1  
SD AND SE ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A  
AND B AND DEFINE THE POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER  
BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.  
MD  
ME  
n
MATRIX SIZE D DIRECTION  
MATRIX SIZE E DIRECTION  
BALL COUNT  
10  
84  
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW SD OR SE = 0.000.  
Ø b  
eE  
0.35  
0.40  
0.45  
BALL DIAMETER  
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW, SD OR SE = e/2  
0.80 BSC.  
0.80 BSC  
0.40 BSC.  
BALL PITCH  
eD  
BALL PITCH  
8. "+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED  
BALLS.  
SD / SE  
SOLDER BALL PLACEMENT  
A2,A3,A4,A5,A6,A7,A8,A9  
B1,B10,C1,C10,D1,D10  
E1,E10,F1,F10,G1,G10  
H1,H10,J1,J10,K1,K10,L1,L10  
M2,M3,M4,M5,M6,M7,M8,M9  
DEPOPULATED SOLDER BALLS  
9. N/A  
10 A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK  
MARK, METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.  
3423 \ 16-038.21a  
12  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
S71WS512/256Nx0_UT November 8, 2004  
TSD084—84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array (FBGA) 12.0 x 9.0 mm MCP  
Compatible Package  
A
D1  
D
eD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
10  
9
8
SE  
7
7
6
E
B
E1  
5
4
3
2
1
eE  
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
M
L K  
INDEX MARK  
10  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
7
SD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
TOP VIEW  
BOTTOM VIEW  
0.20  
0.08  
C
C
A2  
A
C
A1  
SIDE VIEW  
6
84X  
b
0.15  
0.08  
M
C
C
A
B
M
NOTES:  
PACKAGE  
JEDEC  
TSD 084  
N/A  
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER  
ASME Y14.5M-1994.  
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
D x E  
12.00 mm x 9.00 mm  
PACKAGE  
3. BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JESD 95-1, SPP-010.  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
NOM  
---  
MAX  
NOTE  
4.  
e REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.  
A
A1  
---  
1.20  
---  
PROFILE  
5. SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D"  
DIRECTION.  
0.17  
0.81  
---  
BALL HEIGHT  
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE  
"E" DIRECTION.  
A2  
---  
0.94  
BODY THICKNESS  
BODY SIZE  
D
12.00 BSC.  
9.00 BSC.  
8.80 BSC.  
7.20 BSC.  
12  
n IS THE NUMBER OF POPULTED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS  
FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.  
E
BODY SIZE  
D1  
E1  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
6
7
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL  
DIAMETER IN A PLANE PARALLEL TO DATUM C.  
SD AND SE ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A  
AND B AND DEFINE THE POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER  
BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.  
MD  
ME  
n
MATRIX SIZE D DIRECTION  
MATRIX SIZE E DIRECTION  
BALL COUNT  
10  
84  
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW SD OR SE = 0.000.  
φb  
0.35  
0.40  
0.45  
BALL DIAMETER  
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW, SD OR SE = e/2  
eE  
0.80 BSC.  
0.80 BSC  
0.40 BSC.  
BALL PITCH  
eD  
SD / SE  
BALL PITCH  
8. "+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED  
BALLS.  
SOLDER BALL PLACEMENT  
DEPOPULATED SOLDER BALLS  
A2,A3,A4,A5,A6,7,A8,A9  
B1,B10,C1,C10,D1,D10  
E1,E10,F1,F10,G1,G10  
H1,H10,J1,J10,K1,K10,L1,L10  
M2,M3,M4,M5,M6,M7,M8,M9  
9. N/A  
10 A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK  
MARK, METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.  
3426\ 16-038.22  
November 8, 2004 S71WS512/256Nx0_UT  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
13  
TLA084—84-ball Fine-Pitch Ball Grid Array (FBGA) 11.6x8.0x1.2 mm MCP  
Compatible Package  
A
D1  
D
eD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
10  
9
8
SE  
7
7
6
E
B
E1  
5
4
3
2
1
eE  
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
M
L K  
INDEX MARK  
10  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
PIN A1  
CORNER  
7
SD  
0.15  
(2X)  
C
TOP VIEW  
BOTTOM VIEW  
0.20  
C
C
A2  
A
0.08  
C
A1  
SIDE VIEW  
6
84X  
b
0.15  
0.08  
M
C
C
A
B
M
NOTES:  
PACKAGE  
JEDEC  
TLA 084  
N/A  
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER  
ASME Y14.5M-1994.  
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.  
D x E  
11.60 mm x 8.00 mm  
PACKAGE  
3. BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JESD 95-1, SPP-010.  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
---  
NOM  
---  
MAX  
NOTE  
4.  
e REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.  
A
A1  
1.20  
---  
PROFILE  
5. SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D"  
DIRECTION.  
0.17  
0.81  
---  
BALL HEIGHT  
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE  
"E" DIRECTION.  
A2  
---  
0.97  
BODY THICKNESS  
BODY SIZE  
D
11.60 BSC.  
8.00 BSC.  
8.80 BSC.  
7.20 BSC.  
12  
n IS THE NUMBER OF POPULTED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS  
FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.  
E
BODY SIZE  
D1  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
MATRIX FOOTPRINT  
6
7
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL  
DIAMETER IN A PLANE PARALLEL TO DATUM C.  
E1  
SD AND SE ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A  
AND B AND DEFINE THE POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER  
BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.  
MD  
ME  
n
MATRIX SIZE D DIRECTION  
MATRIX SIZE E DIRECTION  
BALL COUNT  
10  
84  
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW SD OR SE = 0.000.  
Ø b  
eE  
0.35  
0.40  
0.45  
BALL DIAMETER  
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE  
OUTER ROW, SD OR SE = e/2  
0.80 BSC.  
0.80 BSC  
0.40 BSC.  
BALL PITCH  
eD  
BALL PITCH  
8. "+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED  
BALLS.  
SD / SE  
SOLDER BALL PLACEMENT  
A2,A3,A4,A5,A6,A7,A8,A9  
B1,B10,C1,C10,D1,D10,  
E1,E10,F1,F10,G1,G10,  
H1,H10,J1,J10,K1,K10,L1,L10,  
M2,M3,M4,M5,M6,M7,M8,M9  
DEPOPULATED SOLDER BALLS  
9. N/A  
10 A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK  
MARK, METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.  
3372-2 \ 16-038.22a  
Note: BSC is an ANSI standard for Basic Space Centering  
14  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
S71WS512/256Nx0_UT November 8, 2004  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family  
S29WS256N, S29WS128N, S29WS064N  
256/128/64 Megabit (16/8/4 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 1.8 Volt-only  
Simultaneous Read/Write, Burst Mode Flash Memory  
Data Sheet  
PRELIMINARY  
General Description  
The Spansion S29WS256/128/064N are MirrorbitTM Flash products fabricated on 110 nm process technology. These burst  
mode Flash devices are capable of performing simultaneous read and write operations with zero latency on two separate  
banks using separate data and address pins. They operate up to 80 MHz and use a single VCC of 1.7–1.95 volts that  
makes them ideal for today’s demanding wireless applications requiring higher density, better performance and lowered  
power consumption.  
Distinctive Characteristics  
„
„
„
Single 1.8 V read/program/erase (1.70–1.95 V)  
„
„
Command set compatible with JEDEC standards  
110 nm MirrorBit™ Technology  
Hardware (WP#) protection of top and bottom  
sectors  
Simultaneous Read/Write operation with zero  
latency  
„
„
Dual boot sector configuration (top and bottom)  
Offered Packages  
„
„
32-word Write Buffer  
Sixteen-bank architecture consisting of 16/8/4  
Mbit for WS256N/128N/064N, respectively  
WS064N: 80-ball FBGA (7 mm x 9 mm)  
WS256N/128N: 84-ball FBGA (8 mm x 11.6 mm)  
„
„
„
Four 16 Kword sectors at both top and bottom of  
memory array  
„
„
Low VCC write inhibit  
Persistent and Password methods of Advanced  
Sector Protection  
254/126/62 64 Kword sectors (WS256N/128N/  
064N)  
„
Write operation status bits indicate program and  
erase operation completion  
Programmable burst read modes  
Linear for 32, 16 or 8 words linear read with or  
without wrap-around  
„
„
„
Suspend and Resume commands for Program and  
Erase operations  
Continuous sequential read mode  
Unlock Bypass program command to reduce  
programming time  
„
SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector region consisting  
of 128 words each for factory and customer  
Synchronous or Asynchronous program operation,  
independent of burst control register settings  
„
„
20-year data retention (typical)  
Cycling Endurance: 100,000 cycles per sector  
(typical)  
„
„
„
ACC input pin to reduce factory programming time  
Support for Common Flash Interface (CFI)  
„
RDY output indicates data available to system  
Industrial Temperature range (contact factory)  
Performance Characteristics  
Read Access Times  
Current Consumption (typical values)  
Speed Option (MHz)  
Max. Synch. Latency, ns (t  
80  
69  
66  
69  
54  
69  
Continuous Burst Read @ 66 MHz  
35 mA  
50 mA  
19 mA  
19 mA  
20 µA  
)
Simultaneous Operation (asynchronous)  
Program (asynchronous)  
IACC  
Max. Synch. Burst Access, ns (t  
)
9
11.2  
70  
13.5  
70  
BACC  
Max. Asynch. Access Time, ns (t  
)
70  
Erase (asynchronous)  
ACC  
Max CE# Access Time, ns (t  
)
70  
70  
70  
Standby Mode (asynchronous)  
CE  
Max OE# Access Time, ns (t  
)
11.2  
11.2  
13.5  
OE  
Typical Program & Erase Times  
Single Word Programming  
Effective Write Buffer Programming (V ) Per Word  
40 µs  
9.4 µs  
6 µs  
CC  
Effective Write Buffer Programming (V  
Sector Erase (16 Kword Sector)  
Sector Erase (64 Kword Sector)  
) Per Word  
ACC  
150 ms  
600 ms  
Publication Number S29WSxxxN_M0 Revision F Amendment 0 Issue Date November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
1
Input/Output Descriptions & Logic Symbol  
Table identifies the input and output package connections provided on the device.  
Table 1.1. Input/Output Descriptions  
Symbol  
A23–A0  
DQ15–DQ0  
CE#  
Type  
Input  
Description  
Address lines for WS256N (A22-A0 for WS128 and A21-A0 for WS064N).  
Data input/output.  
I/O  
Input  
Chip Enable. Asynchronous relative to CLK.  
Output Enable. Asynchronous relative to CLK.  
Write Enable.  
OE#  
Input  
WE#  
Input  
V
Supply  
Input  
Device Power Supply.  
CC  
V
VersatileIO Input. Should be tied to V  
.
CC  
IO  
V
I/O  
Ground.  
SS  
NC  
No Connect  
Output  
Not connected internally.  
RDY  
Ready. Indicates when valid burst data is ready to be read.  
Clock Input. In burst mode, after the initial word is output, subsequent active edges of CLK  
CLK  
Input  
Input  
increment the internal address counter. Should be at V or V while in asynchronous  
IL IH  
mode.  
Address Valid. Indicates to device that the valid address is present on the address inputs.  
When low during asynchronous mode, indicates valid address; when low during burst  
mode, causes starting address to be latched at the next active clock edge.  
AVD#  
When high, device ignores address inputs.  
RESET#  
WP#  
Input  
Input  
Hardware Reset. Low = device resets and returns to reading array data.  
Write Protect. At V , disables program and erase functions in the four outermost sectors.  
IL  
Should be at V for all other conditions.  
IH  
Acceleration Input. At V , accelerates programming; automatically places device in  
HH  
ACC  
RFU  
Input  
unlock bypass mode. At V , disables all program and erase functions. Should be at V for  
IL IH  
all other conditions.  
Reserved for future use (see MCP look-ahead pinout for use with MCP).  
Reserved  
16  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family  
S29WSxxxN_M0F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
2 Block Diagram  
DQ15DQ0  
VCC  
VSS  
VIO  
RDY  
Buffer  
RDY  
Input/Output  
Buffers  
Erase Voltage  
Generator  
WE#  
RESET#  
WP#  
State  
Control  
ACC  
Command  
Register  
PGM Voltage  
Generator  
Data  
Latch  
Chip Enable  
Output Enable  
Logic  
CE#  
OE#  
Y-Decoder  
Y-Gating  
VCC  
Detector  
Timer  
Cell Matrix  
X-Decoder  
Burst  
State  
Control  
Burst  
Address  
Counter  
AVD#  
CLK  
Amax–A0*  
*
WS256N: A23-A0  
WS128N: A22-A0  
WS064N: A21-A0  
Figure 2.1. S29WSxxxN Block Diagram  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
S29WSxxxN MirrorBit™ Flash Family  
17  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
3 Additional Resources  
Visit www.amd.com and www.fujitsu.com to obtain the following related documents:  
Application Notes  
„ Using the Operation Status Bits in AMD Devices  
„ Understanding Burst Mode Flash Memory Devices  
„ Simultaneous Read/Write vs. Erase Suspend/Resume  
„ MirrorBit™ Flash Memory Write Buffer Programming and Page Buffer Read  
„ Design-In Scalable Wireless Solutions with Spansion Products  
„ Common Flash Interface Version 1.4 Vendor Specific Extensions  
Specification Bulletins  
Contact your local sales office for details.  
Drivers and Software Support  
„ Spansion low-level drivers  
„ Enhanced Flash drivers  
„ Flash file system  
CAD Modeling Support  
„ VHDL and Verilog  
„ IBIS  
„ ORCAD  
Technical Support  
Contact your local sales office or contact Spansion LLC directly for additional technical  
support:  
Email  
US and Canada: HW.support@amd.com  
Asia Pacific: asia.support@amd.com  
Europe, Middle East, and Africa  
Japan: http://edevice.fujitsu.com/jp/support/tech/#b7  
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)  
http://ask.amd.com/  
http://edevice.fujitsu.com/jp/support/tech/#b7  
Phone  
US: (408) 749-5703  
Japan (03) 5322-3324  
Spansion LLC Locations  
915 DeGuigne Drive, P.O. Box 3453  
Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3453, USA  
Telephone: 408-962-2500 or  
1-866-SPANSION  
Spansion Japan Limited  
4-33-4 Nishi Shinjuku, Shinjuku-ku  
Tokyo, 160-0023  
Telephone: +81-3-5302-2200  
Facsimile: +81-3-5302-2674  
http://www.spansion.com  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
18  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
4 Product Overview  
The S29WSxxxN family consists of 256, 128 and 64Mbit, 1.8 volts-only, simultaneous read/  
write burst mode Flash device optimized for today’s wireless designs that demand a large  
storage array, rich functionality, and low power consumption. These devices are organized in  
16, 8 or 4 Mwords of 16 bits each and are capable of continuous, synchronous (burst) read  
or linear read (8-, 16-, or 32-word aligned group) with or without wrap around. These prod-  
ucts also offer single word programming or a 32-word buffer for programming with program/  
erase and suspend functionality. Additional features include:  
„ Advanced Sector Protection methods for protecting sectors as required  
„ 256 words of secured silicon (SecSi™) area for storing customer and factory secured in-  
formation. The SecSi Sector is One Time Programmable and Protectable (OTTP).  
4.1 Memory Map  
The S29WS256/128/064N Mbit devices consist of 16 banks organized as shown in Tables 4.1–  
4.3.  
Table 4.1. S29WS256N Sector & Memory Address Map  
Bank  
Size  
Sector  
Count  
Sector Size  
(KB)  
Sector/  
Sector Range  
Bank  
Address Range  
Notes  
SA000  
000000h–003FFFh  
SA001  
004000h–007FFFh  
Contains four smaller sectors at  
bottom of addressable memory.  
4
32  
2 MB  
0
SA002  
008000h–00BFFFh  
SA003  
00C000h–00FFFFh  
15  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
15  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
SA004 to SA018  
SA019 to SA034  
SA035 to SA050  
SA051 to SA066  
SA067 to SA082  
SA083 to SA098  
SA099 to SA114  
SA115 to SA130  
SA131 to SA146  
SA147 to SA162  
SA163 to SA178  
SA179 to SA194  
SA195 to SA210  
SA211 to SA226  
SA227 to SA242  
SA243 to SA257  
SA258  
010000h–01FFFFh to 0F0000h–0FFFFFh  
100000h–10FFFFh to 1F0000h–1FFFFFh  
200000h–20FFFFh to 2F0000h–2FFFFFh  
300000h–30FFFFh to 3F0000h–3FFFFFh  
400000h–40FFFFh to 4F0000h–4FFFFFh  
500000h–50FFFFh to 5F0000h–5FFFFFh  
600000h–60FFFFh to 6F0000h–6FFFFFh  
700000h–70FFFFh to 7F0000h–7FFFFFh  
800000h–80FFFFh to 8F0000h–8FFFFFh  
900000h–90FFFFh to 9F0000h–9FFFFFh  
A00000h–A0FFFFh to AF0000h–AFFFFFh  
B00000h–B0FFFFh to BF0000h–BFFFFFh  
C00000h–C0FFFFh to CF0000h–CFFFFFh  
D00000h–D0FFFFh to DF0000h–DFFFFFh  
E00000h–E0FFFFh to EF0000h–EFFFFFh  
F00000h–F0FFFFh to FE0000h–FEFFFFh  
FF0000h–FF3FFFh  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
2 MB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
All 128 KB sectors.  
Pattern for sector address range  
is xx0000h–xxFFFFh.  
(see note)  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
2 MB  
15  
SA259  
FF4000h–FF7FFFh  
Contains four smaller sectors at  
top of addressable memory.  
4
32  
SA260  
FF8000h–FFBFFFh  
SA261  
FFC000h–FFFFFFh  
Note: This table has been condensed to show sector-related information for an entire device on a single page. Sectors and their  
address ranges that are not explicitly listed (such as SA005–SA017) have sector starting and ending addresses that form the same  
pattern as all other sectors of that size. For example, all 128 KB sectors have the pattern xx00000h–xxFFFFh.  
19  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 4.2. S29WS128N Sector & Memory Address Map  
Sector  
Count  
Sector Size  
(KB)  
Sector/  
Sector Range  
Bank Size  
Bank  
Address Range  
Notes  
32  
32  
SA000  
000000h–003FFFh  
SA001  
004000h–007FFFh  
Contains four smaller sectors at  
bottom of addressable memory.  
4
1 MB  
32  
0
SA002  
008000h–00BFFFh  
32  
SA003  
00C000h–00FFFFh  
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
32  
SA004 to SA010  
SA011 to SA018  
SA019 to SA026  
SA027 to SA034  
SA035 to SA042  
SA043 to SA050  
SA051 to SA058  
SA059 to SA066  
SA067 to SA074  
SA075 to SA082  
SA083 to SA090  
SA091 to SA098  
SA099 to SA106  
SA107 to SA114  
SA115 to SA122  
SA123 to SA129  
SA130  
010000h–01FFFFh to 070000h–07FFFFh  
080000h–08FFFFh to 0F0000h–0FFFFFh  
100000h–10FFFFh to 170000h–17FFFFh  
180000h–18FFFFh to 1F0000h–1FFFFFh  
200000h–20FFFFh to 270000h–27FFFFh  
280000h–28FFFFh to 2F0000h–2FFFFFh  
300000h–30FFFFh to 370000h–37FFFFh  
380000h–38FFFFh to 3F0000h–3FFFFFh  
400000h–40FFFFh to 470000h–47FFFFh  
480000h–48FFFFh to 4F0000h–4FFFFFh  
500000h–50FFFFh to 570000h–57FFFFh  
580000h–58FFFFh to 5F0000h–5FFFFFh  
600000h–60FFFFh to 670000h–67FFFFh  
680000h–68FFFFh to 6F0000h–6FFFFFh  
700000h–70FFFFh to 770000h–77FFFFh  
780000h–78FFFFh to 7E0000h–7EFFFFh  
7F0000h–7F3FFFh  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1 MB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
All 128 KB sectors.  
Pattern for sector address range  
is xx0000h–xxFFFFh.  
(see note)  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
1 MB  
32  
15  
SA131  
7F4000h–7F7FFFh  
Contains four smaller sectors at  
top of addressable memory.  
4
32  
SA132  
7F8000h–7FBFFFh  
32  
SA133  
7FC000h–7FFFFFh  
Note: This table has been condensed to show sector-related information for an entire device on a single page. Sectors and their  
address ranges that are not explicitly listed (such as SA005–SA009) have sector starting and ending addresses that form the same  
pattern as all other sectors of that size. For example, all 128 KB sectors have the pattern xx00000h–xxFFFFh.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
20  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 4.3. S29WS064N Sector & Memory Address Map  
Sector  
Count  
Sector Size  
(KB)  
Sector/  
Sector Range  
Bank Size  
Bank  
Address Range  
000000h–003FFFh  
Notes  
SA000  
SA001  
004000h–007FFFh  
Contains four smaller sectors at  
bottom of addressable memory.  
4
32  
SA002  
008000h–00BFFFh  
0.5 MB  
0
SA003  
00C000h–00FFFFh  
SA004  
010000h–01FFFFh  
3
128  
SA005  
020000h–02FFFFh  
SA006  
030000h–03FFFFh  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
0.5 MB  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
1
2
SA007–SA010  
SA011–SA014  
SA015–SA018  
SA019–SA022  
SA023–SA026  
SA027–SA030  
SA031–SA034  
SA035–SA038  
SA039–SA042  
SA043–SA046  
SA047–SA050  
SA051–SA054  
SA055–SA058  
SA059–SA062  
SA063  
040000h–04FFFFh to 070000h–07FFFFh  
080000h–08FFFFh to 0B0000h–0BFFFFh  
0C0000h–0CFFFFh to 0F0000h–0FFFFFh  
100000h–10FFFFh to 130000h–13FFFFh  
140000h–14FFFFh to 170000h–17FFFFh  
180000h–18FFFFh to 1B0000h–1BFFFFh  
1C0000h–1CFFFFh to 1F0000h–1FFFFFh  
200000h–20FFFFh to 230000h–23FFFFh  
240000h–24FFFFh to 270000h–27FFFFh  
280000h–28FFFFh to 2B0000h–2BFFFFh  
2C0000h–2CFFFFh to 2F0000h–2FFFFFh  
300000h–30FFFFh to 330000h–33FFFFh  
340000h–34FFFFh to 370000h–37FFFFh  
380000h–38FFFFh to 3B0000h–3BFFFFh  
3C0000h–3CFFFFh  
3
4
5
6
All 128 KB sectors.  
Pattern for sector address range is  
xx0000h–xxFFFFh.  
7
8
(see note)  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
3
128  
SA064  
3D0000h–3DFFFFh  
SA065  
3E0000h–3EFFFFh  
0.5 MB  
15  
SA066  
3F0000h–3F3FFFh  
SA067  
3F4000h–3F7FFFh  
Contains four smaller sectors at top  
of addressable memory.  
4
32  
SA068  
3F8000h–3FBFFFh  
SA069  
3FC000h–3FFFFFh  
Note: This table has been condensed to show sector-related information for an entire device on a single page. Sectors and their  
address ranges that are not explicitly listed (such as SA008–SA009) have sector starting and ending addresses that form the same  
pattern as all other sectors of that size. For example, all 128 KB sectors have the pattern xx00000h–xxFFFFh.  
21  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
5 Device Operations  
This section describes the read, program, erase, simultaneous read/write operations, hand-  
shaking, and reset features of the Flash devices.  
Operations are initiated by writing specific commands or a sequence with specific address and  
data patterns into the command registers (see Tables 10.1 and 10.2). The command register  
itself does not occupy any addressable memory location; rather, it is composed of latches that  
store the commands, along with the address and data information needed to execute the  
command. The contents of the register serve as input to the internal state machine and the  
state machine outputs dictate the function of the device. Writing incorrect address and data  
values or writing them in an improper sequence may place the device in an unknown state,  
in which case the system must write the reset command to return the device to the reading  
array data mode.  
5.1 Device Operation Table  
The device must be setup appropriately for each operation. Table 5.4 describes the required  
state of each control pin for any particular operation.  
Table 5.4. Device Operations  
Operation  
CE#  
L
OE#  
L
WE#  
Addresses  
Addr In  
Addr In  
Addr In  
Addr In  
X
DQ15–0  
Data Out  
Data Out  
I/O  
RESET#  
CLK  
X
AVD#  
Asynchronous Read - Addresses Latched  
Asynchronous Read - Addresses Steady State  
Asynchronous Write  
H
H
L
H
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
X
L
L
L
H
X
Synchronous Write  
L
H
L
I/O  
Standby (CE#)  
H
X
X
X
X
HIGH Z  
HIGH Z  
X
X
X
X
Hardware Reset  
X
X
Burst Read Operations (Synchronous)  
Load Starting Burst Address  
L
L
X
L
H
H
Addr In  
X
X
H
H
Advance Burst to next address with appropriate  
Data presented on the Data Bus  
Burst  
Data Out  
H
Terminate current Burst read cycle  
H
X
X
X
H
H
X
X
HIGH Z  
HIGH Z  
H
L
X
X
Terminate current Burst read cycle via RESET#  
X
Terminate current Burst read cycle and start new  
Burst read cycle  
L
X
H
Addr In  
I/O  
H
Legend: L = Logic 0, H = Logic 1, X = Don’t Care, I/O = Input/Output.  
5.2 Asynchronous Read  
All memories require access time to output array data. In an asynchronous read operation,  
data is read from one memory location at a time. Addresses are presented to the device in  
random order, and the propagation delay through the device causes the data on its outputs  
to arrive asynchronously with the address on its inputs.  
The device defaults to reading array data asynchronously after device power-up or hardware  
reset. To read data from the memory array, the system must first assert a valid address on  
A
–A0, while driving AVD# and CE# to V . WE# should remain at V . The rising edge of  
IL IH  
max  
AVD# latches the address and data will appear on DQ15–DQ0 after address access time  
(t ), which is equal to the delay from stable addresses to valid output data. The chip enable  
ACC  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
22  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
access time (t ) is the delay from the stable CE# to valid data at the outputs. The output  
CE  
enable access time (t ) is the delay from the falling edge of OE# to valid data at the output.  
OE  
5.3 Synchronous (Burst) Read Mode &  
Configuration Register  
When a series of adjacent addresses needs to be read from the device (in order from lowest  
to highest address), the synchronous (or burst read) mode can be used to significantly reduce  
the overall time needed for the device to output array data. After an initial access time re-  
quired for the data from the first address location, subsequent data is output synchronized to  
a clock input provided by the system.  
The device offers both continuous and linear methods of burst read operation, which are dis-  
cussed in subsections 5.3.1 and 5.3.2, and 5.3.3.  
Since the device defaults to asynchronous read mode after power-up or a hardware reset, the  
configuration register must be set to enable the burst read mode. Other Configuration Regis-  
ter settings include the number of wait states to insert before the initial word (t  
) of each  
IACC  
burst access, the burst mode in which to operate, and when RDY will indicate data is ready  
to be read. Prior to entering the burst mode, the system should first determine the configu-  
ration register settings (and read the current register settings if desired via the Read  
Configuration Register command sequence), and then write the configuration register com-  
mand sequence. See Section 5.3.4, Configuration Register, and Table 10.1, Memory Array  
Commands for further details.  
Power-up/  
Hardware Reset  
Asynchronous Read  
Mode Only  
Set Burst Mode  
Configuration Register  
Command for  
Set Burst Mode  
Configuration Register  
Command for  
Synchronous Mode  
(CR15 = 0)  
Asynchronous Mode  
(CR15 = 1)  
Synchronous Read  
Mode Only  
Figure 5.1. Synchronous/Asynchronous State Diagram  
The device outputs the initial word subject to the following operational conditions:  
„ t  
specification: the time from the rising edge of the first clock cycle after addresses  
IACC  
are latched to valid data on the device outputs.  
„ configuration register setting CR13–CR11: the total number of clock cycles (wait states)  
that occur before valid data appears on the device outputs. The effect is that t  
lengthened.  
is  
IACC  
23  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
The device outputs subsequent words t  
after the active edge of each successive clock cy-  
BACC  
cle, which also increments the internal address counter. The device outputs burst data at this  
rate subject to the following operational conditions:  
„ starting address: whether the address is divisible by four (where A[1:0] is 00). A divisi-  
ble-by-four address incurs the least number of additional wait states that occur after the  
initial word. The number of additional wait states required increases for burst operations  
in which the starting address is one, two, or three locations above the divisible-by-four  
address (i.e., where A[1:0] is 01, 10, or 11).  
„ boundary crossing: a physical aspect of the device that exists every 128 words, starting  
at address 00007Fh. Higher operational speeds require one additional wait state. Refer to  
Tables 5.10–5.13 for details. Figure 9.20 shows the effects of boundary crossings at higher  
frequencies.  
„ clock frequency: the speed at which the device is expected to burst data. Higher speeds  
require additional wait states after the initial word for proper operation. Tables 5.7–5.13  
show the effects of frequency on burst operation.  
In all cases, with or without latency, the RDY output indicates when the next data is available  
to be read.  
Table 5.5 shows the latency that occurs in the S29WS256N device when (x indicates the rec-  
ommended number of wait states for various operating frequencies, as shown in Table 5.15,  
configuration register bits CR13-CR11).  
Tables 5.7–5.9 show the effects of various combinations of the starting address, operating  
frequency, and wait state setting (configuration register bits CR13–CR11) for the S29WS128N  
and S29WS064N devices. Tables 5.10–5.13 includes the wait state that occurs when crossing  
the internal boundary.  
Table 5.5. Address Latency for x Wait States (80 MHz, WS256N only)  
Word  
Wait States  
Cycle  
0
1
2
3
x ws  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D3  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D8  
D8  
D8  
D8  
x ws  
1 ws  
1 ws  
1 ws  
D4  
x ws  
D3  
1 ws  
1 ws  
D4  
x ws  
1 ws  
D4  
Table 5.6. Address Latency for 6 Wait States (80 MHz)  
Word  
Wait States  
Cycle  
0
1
2
3
6 ws  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D3  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D8  
D8  
D8  
D8  
6 ws  
1 ws  
1 ws  
1 ws  
D4  
6 ws  
D3  
1 ws  
1 ws  
D4  
6 ws  
1 ws  
D4  
Table 5.7. Address Latency for 5 Wait States (68 MHz)  
Word  
Wait States  
Cycle  
0
1
2
3
5 ws  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D3  
D3  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D8  
D8  
D8  
D8  
D9  
D9  
D9  
5 ws  
D5  
5 ws  
D3  
1 ws  
1 ws  
D5  
5 ws  
1 ws  
D5  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
24  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 5.8. Address Latency for 4 Wait States (54 MHz)  
Word  
Wait States  
Cycle  
0
1
2
3
4 ws  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D4  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D5  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D7  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D8  
D7  
D8  
D9  
D9  
D8  
D9  
4 ws  
D5  
4 ws  
D3  
D6  
D10  
D10  
4 ws  
1 ws  
D6  
Table 5.9. Address Latency for 3 Wait States (40 MHz)  
Word  
Wait States  
Cycle  
0
1
2
3
3 ws  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D9  
D7  
D8  
D8  
D9  
3 ws  
D5  
3 ws  
D6  
D9  
D10  
D11  
3 ws  
D7  
D10  
Table 5.10. Address/Boundary Crossing Latency for 6 Wait States (80 MHz)  
Word  
Wait States  
Cycle  
1 ws  
1 ws  
1 ws  
1 ws  
0
1
2
3
6 ws  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D3  
D3  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
6 ws  
1 ws  
1 ws  
1 ws  
6 ws  
D3  
1 ws  
1 ws  
6 ws  
1 ws  
Table 5.11. Address/Boundary Crossing Latency for 5 Wait States (68 MHz)  
Word  
Wait States  
Cycle  
0
1
2
3
5 ws  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D3  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D5  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D8  
D8  
D8  
D8  
5 ws  
1 ws  
1 ws  
1 ws  
D4  
5 ws  
D3  
1 ws  
1 ws  
D4  
5 ws  
1 ws  
D4  
Table 5.12. Address/Boundary Crossing Latency for 4 Wait States (54 MHz)  
Word  
Wait States  
Cycle  
0
1
2
3
4 ws  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D3  
D3  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D6  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D7  
D8  
D8  
D8  
D8  
D9  
D9  
D9  
4 ws  
D5  
4 ws  
D3  
1 ws  
1 ws  
D5  
4 ws  
1 ws  
D5  
Table 5.13. Address/Boundary Crossing Latency for 3 Wait States (40 MHz)  
Word  
Wait States  
Cycle  
0
1
2
3
3 ws  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D4  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D5  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D7  
D6  
D7  
D8  
D8  
D7  
D8  
D9  
D9  
D8  
D9  
3 ws  
D5  
3 ws  
D3  
D6  
D10  
D10  
3 ws  
1 ws  
D6  
25  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Write Unlock Cycles:  
Address 555h, Data AAh  
Address 2AAh, Data 55h  
Unlock Cycle 1  
Unlock Cycle 2  
Write Set Configuration Register  
Command and Settings:  
Address 555h, Data D0h  
Address X00h, Data CR  
Command Cycle  
CR = Configuration Register Bits CR15-CR0  
Load Initial Address  
Address = RA  
RA = Read Address  
CR13-CR11 sets initial access time  
(from address latched to  
Wait tIACC  
+
Programmable Wait State Setting  
valid data) from 2 to 7 clock cycles  
Read Initial Data  
RD = DQ[15:0]  
RD = Read Data  
Wait X Clocks:  
Additional Latency Due to Starting  
Address, Clock Frequency, and  
Boundary Crossing  
See Tables 5.6–5.13 to determine total  
number of clocks required for X.  
Read Next Data  
RD = DQ[15:0]  
Delay X Clocks  
Crossing  
No  
End of Data?  
Boundary?  
Yes  
Yes  
Completed  
Figure 5.2. Synchronous Read  
5.3.1 Continuous Burst Read Mode  
In the continuous burst read mode, the device outputs sequential burst data from the starting  
address given and then wrap around to address 000000h when it reaches the highest addres-  
sable memory location. The burst read mode will continue until the system drives CE# high,  
RESET# low, or AVD# low in conjunction with a new address.  
If the address being read crosses a 128-word line boundary and the subsequent word line is  
not programming or erasing, additional latency cycles are required as shown in Tables 5.10–  
5.13.  
If the address crosses a bank boundary while the subsequent bank is programming or eras-  
ing, the device will provide read status information and the clock will be ignored. Upon  
completion of status read or program or erase operation, the host can restart a burst read  
operation using a new address and AVD# pulse.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
26  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
5.3.2 8-, 16-, 32-Word Linear Burst Read with Wrap Around  
In a linear burst read operation, a fixed number of words (8, 16, or 32 words) are read from  
consecutive addresses that are determined by the group within which the starting address  
falls. The groups are sized according to the number of words read in a single burst sequence  
for a given mode (see Table 5.14).  
For example, if the starting address in the 8-word mode is 3Ch, the address range to be read  
would be 38-3Fh, and the burst sequence would be 3C-3D-3E-3F-38-39-3A-3Bh. Thus, the  
device outputs all words in that burst address group until all word are read, regardless of  
where the starting address occurs in the address group, and then terminates the burst read.  
In a similar fashion, the 16-word and 32-word Linear Wrap modes begin their burst sequence  
on the starting address written to the device, then wrap back to the first address in the se-  
lected address group.  
Note that in this mode the address pointer does not cross the boundary that occurs every 128  
words; thus, no wait states are inserted (except during the initial access).  
Table 5.14. Burst Address Groups  
Mode  
Group Size  
8 words  
Group Address Ranges  
0-7h, 8-Fh, 10-17h,...  
0-Fh, 10-1Fh, 20-2Fh,...  
00-1Fh, 20-3Fh, 40-5Fh,...  
8-word  
16-word  
32-word  
16 words  
32 words  
5.3.3 8-, 16-, 32-Word Linear Burst without Wrap Around  
If wrap around is not enabled for linear burst read operations, the 8-word, 16-word, or 32-  
word burst will execute up to the maximum memory address of the selected number of words.  
The burst will stop after 8, 16, or 32 addresses and will not wrap around to the first address  
of the selected group.  
For example, if the starting address in the 8- word mode is 3Ch, the address range to be read  
would be 39-40h, and the burst sequence would be 3C-3D-3E-3F-40-41-42-43h if wrap  
around is not enabled. The next address to be read will require a new address and AVD#  
pulse. Note that in this burst read mode, the address pointer may cross the boundary that  
occurs every 128 words.  
5.3.4 Configuration Register  
The configuration register sets various operational features, most of which are associated  
with burst mode. Upon power-up or hardware reset, the device defaults to the asynchronous  
read mode, and the configuration register settings are in their default state. The host system  
should determine the proper settings for the entire configuration register, and then execute  
the Set Configuration Register command sequence, before attempting burst operations. The  
configuration register is not reset after deasserting CE#. The Configuration Register can also  
be read using a command sequence (see Table 10.1). The following list describes the register  
settings.  
27  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 5.15. Configuration Register  
CR Bit  
Function  
Settings (Binary)  
0 = Synchronous Read (Burst Mode) Enabled  
1 = Asynchronous Read Mode (default) Enabled  
CR15  
Set Device Read Mode  
0 = No extra boundary crossing latency  
1 = With extra boundary crossing latency (default)  
CR14  
Boundary Crossing  
Must be set to “1” at higher operating frequencies. See Tables 5.10–5.13.  
000 = Data valid on 2nd active CLK edge after addresses latched  
001 = Data valid on 3rd active CLK edge after addresses latched  
010 = Data valid on 4th active CLK edge after addresses latched (recommended for 54 MHz)  
011 = Data valid on 5th active CLK edge after addresses latched (recommended for 66 MHz)  
100 = Data valid on 6th active CLK edge after addresses latched (recommended for 80 MHz)  
101 = Data valid on 7th active CLK edge after addresses latched (default)  
110 = Reserved  
CR13  
CR12  
CR11  
Programmable  
Wait State  
111 = Reserved  
Inserts wait states before initial data is available. Setting greater number of wait states before initial data  
reduces latency after initial data. See Tables 5.6–5.13.  
0 = RDY signal active low  
1 = RDY signal active high (default)  
CR10  
CR9  
RDY Polarity  
Reserved  
1 = default  
0 = RDY active one clock cycle before data  
1 = RDY active with data (default)  
CR8  
RDY  
When CR13-CR11 are set to 000, RDY will be active with data regardless of CR8 setting.  
CR7  
CR6  
CR5  
CR4  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
1 = default  
1 = default  
0 = default  
0 = default  
0 = No Wrap Around Burst  
1 = Wrap Around Burst (default)  
CR3  
Burst Wrap Around  
000 = Continuous (default)  
010 = 8-Word Linear Burst  
011 = 16-Word Linear Burst  
100 = 32-Word Linear Burst  
(All other bit settings are reserved)  
CR2  
CR1  
CR0  
Burst Length  
Note: Configuration Register will be in the default state upon power-up or hardware reset.  
Reading the Configuration Table. The configuration register can be read with a four-cycle  
command sequence. See Table 10.1 for sequence details. Once the data has been read from  
the configuration register, a software reset command is required to set the device into the  
correct state.  
5.4 Autoselect  
The Autoselect mode provides manufacturer and device identification, and sector protection  
verification, through identifier codes output from the internal register (separate from the  
memory array) on DQ15-DQ0. This mode is primarily intended for programming equipment  
to automatically match a device to be programmed with its corresponding programming al-  
gorithm. The Autoselect codes can also be accessed in-system. When verifying sector  
protection, the sector address must appear on the appropriate highest order address bits (see  
Tables 5.17 to 5.16). The remaining address bits are don't care. When all necessary bits have  
been set as required, the programming equipment may then read the corresponding identifier  
code on DQ15-DQ0. The Autoselect codes can also be accessed in-system through the com-  
mand register. Note that if a Bank Address (BA) on the four uppermost address bits is  
asserted during the third write cycle of the Autoselect command, the host system can read  
Autoselect data from that bank and then immediately read array data from the other bank,  
without exiting the Autoselect mode.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
28  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
„ To access the Autoselect codes, the host system must issue the Autoselect command.  
„ The Autoselect command sequence may be written to an address within a bank that is  
either in the read or erase-suspend-read mode.  
„ The Autoselect command may not be written while the device is actively programming or  
erasing in the other bank. Autoselect does not support simultaneous operations or burst  
mode.  
„ The system must write the reset command to return to the read mode (or erase-suspend-  
read mode if the bank was previously in Erase Suspend).  
See Table 10.1 for command sequence details.  
Table 5.16. Autoselect Addresses  
Description  
Manufacturer ID  
Device ID, Word 1  
Address  
Read Data  
(BA) + 00h 0001h  
(BA) + 01h 227Eh  
2230 (WS256N)  
Device ID, Word 2  
Device ID, Word 3  
(BA) + 0Eh 2231 (WS128N)  
2232 (WS064N)  
(BA) + 0Fh 2200  
DQ15 - DQ8 = Reserved  
DQ7 (Factory Lock Bit): 1 = Locked, 0 = Not Locked  
DQ6 (Customer Lock Bit): 1 = Locked, 0 = Not Locked  
DQ5 (Handshake Bit): 1 = Reserved, 0 = Standard Handshake  
DQ4, DQ3 (WP# Protection Boot Code): 00 = WP# Protects both Top Boot and  
Bottom Boot Sectors. 01, 10, 11 = Reserved  
Indicator Bits  
(See Note)  
(BA) + 03h  
DQ2 = Reserved  
DQ1 (DYB Power up State [Lock Register DQ4]): 1 = Unlocked (user option),  
0 = Locked (default)  
DQ0 (PPB Eraseability [Lock Register DQ3]): 1 = Erase allowed,  
0 = Erase disabled  
Sector Block Lock/  
Unlock  
(SA) + 02h 0001h = Locked, 0000h = Unlocked  
Note: For WS128N and WS064, DQ1 and DQ0 will be reserved.  
Software Functions and Sample Code  
Table 5.17. Autoselect Entry  
(LLD Function = lld_AutoselectEntryCmd)  
Cycle  
Operation  
Write  
Byte Address  
BAxAAAh  
BAx555h  
Word Address  
BAx555h  
Data  
Unlock Cycle 1  
Unlock Cycle 2  
Autoselect Command  
0x00AAh  
0x0055h  
0x0090h  
Write  
BAx2AAh  
Write  
BAxAAAh  
BAx555h  
29  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 5.18. Autoselect Exit  
(LLD Function = lld_AutoselectExitCmd)  
Cycle  
Operation  
Write  
Byte Address  
Word Address  
base + XXXh  
Data  
Unlock Cycle 1  
base + XXXh  
0x00F0h  
Notes:  
1. Any offset within the device will work.  
2. BA = Bank Address. The bank address is required.  
3. base = base address.  
The following is a C source code example of using the autoselect function to read the manu-  
facturer ID. Refer to the Spansion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available on www.amd.com  
and www.fujitsu.com) for general information on Spansion Flash memory software develop-  
ment guidelines.  
/* Here is an example of Autoselect mode (getting manufacturer ID) */  
/* Define UINT16 example: typedef unsigned short UINT16; */  
UINT16 manuf_id;  
/* Auto Select Entry */  
*( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00AA; /* write unlock cycle 1 */  
*( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x2AA ) = 0x0055; /* write unlock cycle 2 */  
*( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x0090; /* write autoselect command */  
/* multiple reads can be performed after entry */  
manuf_id = *( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x000 ); /* read manuf. id */  
/* Autoselect exit */  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x00F0; /* exit autoselect (write reset command) */  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
30  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
5.5 Program/Erase Operations  
These devices are capable of several modes of programming and or erase operations which  
are described in details during the following sections. However, prior to any programming and  
or erase operation, devices must be setup appropriately as outlined in Table 5.4.  
During a synchronous write operation, to write a command or command sequence (which in-  
cludes programming data to the device and erasing sectors of memory), the system must  
drive AVD# and CE# to V , and OE# to V when providing an address to the device, and  
IL  
IH  
drive WE# and CE# to V , and OE# to V when writing commands or data.  
IL  
IH  
During an asynchronous write operation, the system must drive CE# and WE# to V and OE#  
IL  
to V when providing an address, command, and data. Addresses are latched on the last fall-  
IH  
ing edge of WE# or CE#, while data is latched on the 1st rising edge of WE# or CE#.  
Note the following:  
„ When the Embedded Program algorithm is complete, the device then returns to the read  
mode.  
„ The system can determine the status of the program operation by using DQ7 or DQ6.  
Refer to the Write Operation Status section for information on these status bits.  
„ A “0” cannot be programmed back to a “1.Attempting to do so will cause the device to  
set DQ5 = 1 (halting any further operation and requiring a reset command). A succeeding  
read will show that the data is still “0.”  
„ Only erase operations can convert a “0” to a “1.”  
„ Any commands written to the device during the Embedded Program Algorithm are ig-  
nored except the Program Suspend command.  
„ SecSi Sector, Autoselect, and CFI functions are unavailable when a program operation is  
in progress.  
„ A hardware reset immediately terminates the program operation and the program com-  
mand sequence should be reinitiated once the device has returned to the read mode, to  
ensure data integrity.  
„ Programming is allowed in any sequence and across sector boundaries for single word  
programming operation.  
„ Programming to the same word address multiple times without intervening erases is lim-  
ited. For such application requirements, please contact your local Spansion representa-  
tive.  
5.5.1. Single Word Programming  
Single word programming mode is the simplest method of programming. In this mode, four  
Flash command write cycles are used to program an individual Flash address. The data for  
this programming operation could be 8-, 16- or 32-bits wide. While this method is supported  
by all Spansion devices, in general it is not recommended for devices that support Write  
Buffer Programming. See Table 10.1 for the required bus cycles and Figure 5.19 for the  
flowchart.  
When the Embedded Program algorithm is complete, the device then returns to the read  
mode and addresses are no longer latched. The system can determine the status of the pro-  
gram operation by using DQ7 or DQ6. Refer to the Write Operation Status section for  
information on these status bits.  
„ During programming, any command (except the Suspend Program command) is ignored.  
„ The SecSi Sector, Autoselect, and CFI functions are unavailable when a program opera-  
tion is in progress.  
31  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
„ A hardware reset immediately terminates the program operation. The program command  
sequence should be reinitiated once the device has returned to the read mode, to ensure  
data integrity.  
„ Programming to the same address multiple times continuously (for example, “walking” a  
bit within a word) for an extended period is not recommended. For more information,  
contact your local sales office.  
Write Unlock Cycles:  
Address 555h, Data AAh  
Address 2AAh, Data 55h  
Unlock Cycle 1  
Unlock Cycle 2  
Write Program Command:  
Address 555h, Data A0h  
Setup Command  
Program Address (PA),  
Program Data (PD)  
Program Data to Address:  
PA, PD  
Perform Polling Algorithm  
(see Write Operation Status  
flowchart)  
Yes  
Polling Status  
= Busy?  
No  
Yes  
Polling Status  
= Done?  
Error condition  
No  
(Exceeded Timing Limits)  
PASS. Device is in  
read mode.  
FAIL. Issue reset command  
to return to read array mode.  
Figure 5.19. Single Word Program  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
32  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Software Functions and Sample Code  
Table 5.20. Single Word Program  
(LLD Function = lld_ProgramCmd)  
Cycle  
Operation  
Write  
Byte Address  
Base + AAAh  
Base + 554h  
Base + AAAh  
Word Address  
Word Address  
Base + 555h  
Base + 2AAh  
Base + 555h  
Word Address  
Data  
00AAh  
Unlock Cycle 1  
Unlock Cycle 2  
Program Setup  
Write  
0055h  
Write  
00A0h  
Program  
Write  
Data Word  
Note: Base = Base Address.  
The following is a C source code example of using the single word program function. Refer to  
the Spansion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available on www.amd.com and  
www.fujitsu.com) for general information on Spansion Flash memory software development  
guidelines.  
/* Example: Program Command  
*/  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00AA;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x2AA ) = 0x0055;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00A0;  
/* write unlock cycle 1  
/* write unlock cycle 2  
/* write program setup command  
/* write data to be programmed  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*( (UINT16 *)pa )  
= data;  
/* Poll for program completion */  
5.5.2 Write Buffer Programming  
Write Buffer Programming allows the system to write a maximum of 32 words in one pro-  
gramming operation. This results in a faster effective word programming time than the  
standard “word” programming algorithms. The Write Buffer Programming command se-  
quence is initiated by first writing two unlock cycles. This is followed by a third write cycle  
containing the Write Buffer Load command written at the Sector Address in which program-  
ming will occur. At this point, the system writes the number of “word locations minus 1” that  
will be loaded into the page buffer at the Sector Address in which programming will occur.  
This tells the device how many write buffer addresses will be loaded with data and therefore  
when to expect the “Program Buffer to Flash” confirm command. The number of locations to  
program cannot exceed the size of the write buffer or the operation will abort. (Number  
loaded = the number of locations to program minus 1. For example, if the system will pro-  
gram 6 address locations, then 05h should be written to the device.)  
The system then writes the starting address/data combination. This starting address is the  
first address/data pair to be programmed, and selects the “write-buffer-page” address. All  
subsequent address/data pairs must fall within the elected-write-buffer-page.  
The “write-buffer-page” is selected by using the addresses A  
- A5.  
MAX  
The “write-buffer-page” addresses must be the same for all address/data pairs loaded into  
the write buffer. (This means Write Buffer Programming cannot be performed across multiple  
“write-buffer-pages.This also means that Write Buffer Programming cannot be performed  
across multiple sectors. If the system attempts to load programming data outside of the se-  
lected “write-buffer-page, the operation will ABORT.)  
After writing the Starting Address/Data pair, the system then writes the remaining address/  
data pairs into the write buffer.  
Note that if a Write Buffer address location is loaded multiple times, the “address/data pair”  
counter will be decremented for every data load operation. Also, the last data loaded at a lo-  
cation before the “Program Buffer to Flash” confirm command will be programmed into the  
33  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
device. It is the software's responsibility to comprehend ramifications of loading a write-buffer  
location more than once. The counter decrements for each data load operation, NOT for each  
unique write-buffer-address location. Once the specified number of write buffer locations  
have been loaded, the system must then write the “Program Buffer to Flash” command at the  
Sector Address. Any other address/data write combinations will abort the Write Buffer Pro-  
gramming operation. The device will then “go busy.The Data Bar polling techniques should  
be used while monitoring the last address location loaded into the write buffer. This eliminates  
the need to store an address in memory because the system can load the last address loca-  
tion, issue the program confirm command at the last loaded address location, and then data  
bar poll at that same address. DQ7, DQ6, DQ5, DQ2, and DQ1 should be monitored to deter-  
mine the device status during Write Buffer Programming.  
The write-buffer “embedded” programming operation can be suspended using the standard  
suspend/resume commands. Upon successful completion of the Write Buffer Programming  
operation, the device will return to READ mode.  
The Write Buffer Programming Sequence is ABORTED under any of the following conditions:  
„ Load a value that is greater than the page buffer size during the “Number of Locations to  
Program” step.  
„ Write to an address in a sector different than the one specified during the Write-Buffer-  
Load command.  
„ Write an Address/Data pair to a different write-buffer-page than the one selected by the  
“Starting Address” during the “write buffer data loading” stage of the operation.  
„ Write data other than the “Confirm Command” after the specified number of “data load”  
cycles.  
The ABORT condition is indicated by DQ1 = 1, DQ7 = DATA# (for the “last address location  
loaded”), DQ6 = TOGGLE, DQ5 = 0. This indicates that the Write Buffer Programming Oper-  
ation was ABORTED. A “Write-to-Buffer-Abort reset” command sequence is required when  
using the write buffer Programming features in Unlock Bypass mode. Note that the SecSITM  
sector, autoselect, and CFI functions are unavailable when a program operation is in progress.  
Write buffer programming is allowed in any sequence of memory (or address) locations.  
These flash devices are capable of handling multiple write buffer programming operations on  
the same write buffer address range without intervening erases. However, programming the  
same word address multiple times without intervening erases requires a modified program-  
ming method. Please contact your local SpansionTM representative for details.  
Use of the write buffer is strongly recommended for programming when multiple words are  
to be programmed. Write buffer programming is approximately eight times faster than pro-  
gramming one word at a time.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
34  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Software Functions and Sample Code  
Table 5.21. Write Buffer Program  
(LLD Functions Used = lld_WriteToBufferCmd, lld_ProgramBufferToFlashCmd)  
Cycle  
Description  
Unlock  
Operation  
Write  
Byte Address  
Base + AAAh  
Base + 554h  
Word Address  
Base + 555h  
Base + 2AAh  
Data  
00AAh  
1
2
3
4
Unlock  
Write  
0055h  
Write Buffer Load Command  
Write Word Count  
Write  
Program Address  
Program Address  
0025h  
Write  
Word Count (N–1)h  
Number of words (N) loaded into the write buffer can be from 1 to 32 words.  
5 to 36  
Last  
Load Buffer Word N  
Write Buffer to Flash  
Write  
Write  
Program Address, Word N  
Sector Address  
Word N  
0029h  
Notes:  
1. Base = Base Address.  
2. Last = Last cycle of write buffer program operation; depending on number of  
words written, the total number of cycles may be from 6 to 37.  
3. For maximum efficiency, it is recommended that the write buffer be loaded with  
the highest number of words (N words) possible.  
The following is a C source code example of using the write buffer program function. Refer to  
the Spansion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available on www.amd.com and  
www.fujitsu.com) for general information on Spansion Flash memory software development  
guidelines.  
/* Example: Write Buffer Programming Command  
*/  
/* NOTES: Write buffer programming limited to 16 words. */  
/*  
/*  
/*  
/*  
All addresses to be written to the flash in  
one operation must be within the same flash  
page. A flash page begins at addresses  
evenly divisible by 0x20.  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*/  
UINT16 *src = source_of_data;  
UINT16 *dst = destination_of_data;  
/* address of source data  
/* flash destination address  
/* word count (minus 1)  
/* write unlock cycle 1  
/* write unlock cycle 2  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*/  
UINT16 wc  
= words_to_program -1;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00AA;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x2AA ) = 0x0055;  
*( (UINT16 *)sector_address )  
*( (UINT16 *)sector_address )  
= 0x0025;  
= wc;  
/* write write buffer load command */  
/* write word count (minus 1) */  
loop:  
*dst = *src; /* ALL dst MUST BE SAME PAGE */ /* write source data to destination */  
dst++;  
src++;  
/* increment destination pointer  
/* increment source pointer  
*/  
*/  
if (wc == 0) goto confirm  
wc--;  
goto loop;  
/* done when word count equals zero */  
/* decrement word count  
/* do it again  
*/  
*/  
confirm:  
*( (UINT16 *)sector_address )  
/* poll for completion */  
= 0x0029;  
/* write confirm command  
*/  
/* Example: Write Buffer Abort Reset */  
*( (UINT16 *)addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00AA;  
*( (UINT16 *)addr + 0x2AA ) = 0x0055;  
*( (UINT16 *)addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00F0;  
/* write unlock cycle 1  
/* write unlock cycle 2  
/* write buffer abort reset  
*/  
*/  
*/  
35  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Write Unlock Cycles:  
Address 555h, Data AAh  
Address 2AAh, Data 55h  
Unlock Cycle 1  
Unlock Cycle 2  
Issue  
Write Buffer Load Command:  
Address 555h, Data 25h  
Load Word Count to Program  
Program Data to Address:  
SA = wc  
wc = number of words – 1  
Yes  
Confirm command:  
wc = 0?  
No  
SA 29h  
Wait 4 µs  
Write Next Word,  
Decrement wc:  
PA data , wc = wc – 1  
No  
Write Buffer  
Abort Desired?  
Perform Polling Algorithm  
(see Write Operation Status  
flowchart)  
Yes  
Write to a Different  
Sector Address to Cause  
Write Buffer Abort  
Yes  
Polling Status  
= Done?  
No  
Error?  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Write Buffer  
Abort?  
No  
RESET. Issue Write Buffer  
Abort Reset Command  
PASS. Device is in  
read mode.  
FAIL. Issue reset command  
to return to read array mode.  
Figure 5.22. Write Buffer Programming Operation  
5.5.3 Sector Erase  
The sector erase function erases one or more sectors in the memory array. (See Table 10.1,  
Memory Array Commands; and Figure 5.24, Sector Erase Operation.) The device does not  
require the system to preprogram prior to erase. The Embedded Erase algorithm automati-  
cally programs and verifies the entire memory for an all zero data pattern prior to electrical  
erase. The system is not required to provide any controls or timings during these operations.  
After the command sequence is written, a sector erase time-out of no less than t  
occurs.  
SEA  
During the time-out period, additional sector addresses and sector erase commands may be  
written. Loading the sector erase buffer may be done in any sequence, and the number of  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
36  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
sectors may be from one sector to all sectors. The time between these additional cycles must  
be less than t  
. Any sector erase address and command following the exceeded time-out  
SEA  
(t  
) may or may not be accepted. Any command other than Sector Erase or Erase Suspend  
SEA  
during the time-out period resets that bank to the read mode. The system can monitor DQ3  
to determine if the sector erase timer has timed out (See the “DQ3: Sector Erase Timer” sec-  
tion.) The time-out begins from the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in the command  
sequence.  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, the bank returns to reading array data and  
addresses are no longer latched. Note that while the Embedded Erase operation is in  
progress, the system can read data from the non-erasing banks. The system can determine  
the status of the erase operation by reading DQ7 or DQ6/DQ2 in the erasing bank. Refer to  
“Write Operation Status” for information on these status bits.  
Once the sector erase operation has begun, only the Erase Suspend command is valid. All  
other commands are ignored. However, note that a hardware reset immediately terminates  
the erase operation. If that occurs, the sector erase command sequence should be reinitiated  
once that bank has returned to reading array data, to ensure data integrity.  
Figure 5.24 illustrates the algorithm for the erase operation. Refer to the “Erase/Program Op-  
erations” section for parameters and timing diagrams.  
37  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Software Functions and Sample Code  
Table 5.23. Sector Erase  
(LLD Function = lld_SectorEraseCmd)  
Cycle  
Description  
Unlock  
Operation  
Write  
Byte Address  
Base + AAAh  
Base + 554h  
Base + AAAh  
Base + AAAh  
Base + 554h  
Sector Address  
Word Address  
Base + 555h  
Base + 2AAh  
Base + 555h  
Base + 555h  
Base + 2AAh  
Sector Address  
Data  
1
2
3
4
5
6
00AAh  
0055h  
0080h  
00AAh  
0055h  
0030h  
Unlock  
Write  
Setup Command  
Unlock  
Write  
Write  
Unlock  
Write  
Sector Erase Command  
Write  
Unlimited additional sectors may be selected for erase; command(s) must be written within t  
.
SEA  
The following is a C source code example of using the sector erase function. Refer to the  
Spansion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available on www.amd.com and www.fujitsu.com)  
for general information on Spansion Flash memory software development guidelines.  
/* Example: Sector Erase Command */  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00AA;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x2AA ) = 0x0055;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x0080;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00AA;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x2AA ) = 0x0055;  
/* write unlock cycle 1  
/* write unlock cycle 2  
/* write setup command  
/* write additional unlock cycle 1 */  
/* write additional unlock cycle 2 */  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*( (UINT16 *)sector_address )  
= 0x0030;  
/* write sector erase command  
*/  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
38  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Write Unlock Cycles:  
Address 555h, Data AAh  
Address 2AAh, Data 55h  
Unlock Cycle 1  
Unlock Cycle 2  
Write Sector Erase Cycles:  
Address 555h, Data 80h  
Address 555h, Data AAh  
Address 2AAh, Data 55h  
Sector Address, Data 30h  
Command Cycle 1  
Command Cycle 2  
Command Cycle 3  
Specify first sector for erasure  
Select  
Additional  
Sectors?  
No  
Yes  
Write Additional  
Sector Addresses  
• Each additional cycle must be written within tSEA timeout  
• Timeout resets after each additional cycle is written  
• The host system may monitor DQ3 or wait tSEA to ensure  
acceptance of erase commands  
Yes  
Last Sector  
Selected?  
No  
• No limit on number of sectors  
Poll DQ3.  
DQ3 = 1?  
• Commands other than Erase Suspend or selecting  
additional sectors for erasure during timeout reset device  
to reading array data  
No  
Yes  
Wait 4 µs  
Perform Write Operation  
Status Algorithm  
Status may be obtained by reading DQ7, DQ6 and/or DQ2.  
(see Figure 5.33)  
Yes  
Done?  
No  
No  
Error condition (Exceeded Timing Limits)  
DQ5 = 1?  
Yes  
PASS. Device returns  
to reading array.  
FAIL. Write reset command  
to return to reading array.  
Notes:  
1. See Table 10.1 for erase command sequence.  
2. See the section on DQ3 for information on the sector erase timeout.  
Figure 5.24. Sector Erase Operation  
39  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
5.5.4 Chip Erase Command Sequence  
Chip erase is a six-bus cycle operation as indicated by Table 10.1. These commands invoke  
the Embedded Erase algorithm, which does not require the system to preprogram prior to  
erase. The Embedded Erase algorithm automatically preprograms and verifies the entire  
memory for an all zero data pattern prior to electrical erase. The system is not required to  
provide any controls or timings during these operations. The “Command Definition” section  
in the appendix shows the address and data requirements for the chip erase command  
sequence.  
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, that bank returns to the read mode and  
addresses are no longer latched. The system can determine the status of the erase operation  
by using DQ7 or DQ6/DQ2. Refer to “Write Operation Status” for information on these status  
bits.  
Any commands written during the chip erase operation are ignored. However, note that a  
hardware reset immediately terminates the erase operation. If that occurs, the chip erase  
command sequence should be reinitiated once that bank has returned to reading array data,  
to ensure data integrity.  
Software Functions and Sample Code  
Table 5.25. Chip Erase  
(LLD Function = lld_ChipEraseCmd)  
Cycle  
Description  
Unlock  
Operation  
Write  
Byte Address  
Base + AAAh  
Base + 554h  
Base + AAAh  
Base + AAAh  
Base + 554h  
Base + AAAh  
Word Address  
Base + 555h  
Base + 2AAh  
Base + 555h  
Base + 555h  
Base + 2AAh  
Base + 555h  
Data  
1
2
3
4
5
6
00AAh  
0055h  
0080h  
00AAh  
0055h  
0010h  
Unlock  
Write  
Setup Command  
Unlock  
Write  
Write  
Unlock  
Write  
Chip Erase Command  
Write  
The following is a C source code example of using the chip erase function. Refer to the Span-  
sion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available on www.amd.com and www.fujitsu.com) for  
general information on Spansion Flash memory software development guidelines.  
/* Example: Chip Erase Command */  
/* Note: Cannot be suspended  
*/  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00AA;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x2AA ) = 0x0055;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x0080;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00AA;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x2AA ) = 0x0055;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x0010;  
/* write unlock cycle 1  
/* write unlock cycle 2  
/* write setup command  
/* write additional unlock cycle 1 */  
/* write additional unlock cycle 2 */  
*/  
*/  
*/  
/* write chip erase command  
*/  
5.5.5 Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Commands  
The Erase Suspend command allows the system to interrupt a sector erase operation and  
then read data from, or program data to, any sector not selected for erasure. The bank ad-  
dress is required when writing this command. This command is valid only during the sector  
erase operation, including the minimum t  
time-out period during the sector erase com-  
SEA  
mand sequence. The Erase Suspend command is ignored if written during the chip erase  
operation.  
When the Erase Suspend command is written during the sector erase operation, the device  
requires a maximum of t  
(erase suspend latency) to suspend the erase operation. How-  
ESL  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
40  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
ever, when the Erase Suspend command is written during the sector erase time-out, the  
device immediately terminates the time-out period and suspends the erase operation.  
After the erase operation has been suspended, the bank enters the erase-suspend-read  
mode. The system can read data from or program data to any sector not selected for erasure.  
(The device “erase suspends” all sectors selected for erasure.) Reading at any address within  
erase-suspended sectors produces status information on DQ7-DQ0. The system can use DQ7,  
or DQ6, and DQ2 together, to determine if a sector is actively erasing or is erase-suspended.  
Refer to Table 5.35 for information on these status bits.  
After an erase-suspended program operation is complete, the bank returns to the erase-sus-  
pend-read mode. The system can determine the status of the program operation using the  
DQ7 or DQ6 status bits, just as in the standard program operation.  
In the erase-suspend-read mode, the system can also issue the Autoselect command se-  
quence. Refer to the “Write Buffer Programming Operation” section and the “Autoselect  
Command Sequence” section for details.  
To resume the sector erase operation, the system must write the Erase Resume command.  
The bank address of the erase-suspended bank is required when writing this command. Fur-  
ther writes of the Resume command are ignored. Another Erase Suspend command can be  
written after the chip has resumed erasing.  
Software Functions and Sample Code  
Table 5.26. Erase Suspend  
(LLD Function = lld_EraseSuspendCmd)  
Cycle  
Operation  
Byte Address  
Word Address  
Data  
1
Write  
Bank Address  
Bank Address  
00B0h  
The following is a C source code example of using the erase suspend function. Refer to the  
Spansion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available on www.amd.com and www.fujitsu.com)  
for general information on Spansion Flash memory software development guidelines.  
/* Example: Erase suspend command */  
*( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x00B0;  
/* write suspend command  
*/  
Table 5.27. Erase Resume  
(LLD Function = lld_EraseResumeCmd)  
Cycle  
Operation  
Byte Address  
Word Address  
Bank Address  
Data  
1
Write  
Bank Address  
0030h  
The following is a C source code example of using the erase resume function. Refer to the  
Spansion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available on www.amd.com and www.fujitsu.com)  
for general information on Spansion Flash memory software development guidelines.  
/* Example: Erase resume command */  
*( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x0030;  
/* write resume command  
*/  
/* The flash needs adequate time in the resume state */  
5.5.6 Program Suspend/Program Resume Commands  
The Program Suspend command allows the system to interrupt an embedded programming  
operation or a “Write to Buffer” programming operation so that data can read from any non-  
suspended sector. When the Program Suspend command is written during a programming  
process, the device halts the programming operation within t  
(program suspend latency)  
PSL  
41  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
and updates the status bits. Addresses are “don't-cares” when writing the Program Suspend  
command.  
After the programming operation has been suspended, the system can read array data from  
any non-suspended sector. The Program Suspend command may also be issued during a pro-  
gramming operation while an erase is suspended. In this case, data may be read from any  
addresses not in Erase Suspend or Program Suspend. If a read is needed from the SecSi Sec-  
tor area, then user must use the proper command sequences to enter and exit this region.  
The system may also write the Autoselect command sequence when the device is in Program  
Suspend mode. The device allows reading Autoselect codes in the suspended sectors, since  
the codes are not stored in the memory array. When the device exits the Autoselect mode,  
the device reverts to Program Suspend mode, and is ready for another valid operation. See  
“Autoselect Command Sequence” for more information.  
After the Program Resume command is written, the device reverts to programming. The sys-  
tem can determine the status of the program operation using the DQ7 or DQ6 status bits, just  
as in the standard program operation. See “Write Operation Status” for more information.  
The system must write the Program Resume command (address bits are “don't care”) to exit  
the Program Suspend mode and continue the programming operation. Further writes of the  
Program Resume command are ignored. Another Program Suspend command can be written  
after the device has resumed programming.  
Software Functions and Sample Code  
Table 5.28. Program Suspend  
(LLD Function = lld_ProgramSuspendCmd)  
Cycle  
Operation  
Byte Address  
Word Address  
Data  
1
Write  
Bank Address  
Bank Address  
00B0h  
The following is a C source code example of using the program suspend function. Refer to the  
Spansion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available on www.amd.com and www.fujitsu.com)  
for general information on Spansion Flash memory software development guidelines.  
/* Example: Program suspend command */  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x00B0;  
/* write suspend command  
*/  
Table 5.29. Program Resume  
(LLD Function = lld_ProgramResumeCmd)  
Cycle  
Operation  
Byte Address  
Word Address  
Bank Address  
Data  
1
Write  
Bank Address  
0030h  
The following is a C source code example of using the program resume function. Refer to the  
Spansion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available on www.amd.com and www.fujitsu.com)  
for general information on Spansion Flash memory software development guidelines.  
/* Example: Program resume command */  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x0030;  
/* write resume command  
*/  
5.5.7 Accelerated Program/Chip Erase  
Accelerated single word programming, write buffer programming, sector erase, and chip  
erase operations are enabled through the ACC function. This method is faster than the stan-  
dard chip program and erase command sequences.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
42  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
The accelerated chip program and erase functions must not be used more than 10  
times per sector. In addition, accelerated chip program and erase should be performed at  
room temperature (25°C 10°C).  
If the system asserts V  
on this input, the device automatically enters the aforementioned  
HH  
Unlock Bypass mode and uses the higher voltage on the input to reduce the time required for  
program and erase operations. The system can then use the Write Buffer Load command se-  
quence provided by the Unlock Bypass mode. Note that if a “Write-to-Buffer-Abort Reset” is  
required while in Unlock Bypass mode, the full 3-cycle RESET command sequence must be  
used to reset the device. Removing V  
from the ACC input, upon completion of the embed-  
HH  
ded program or erase operation, returns the device to normal operation.  
„ Sectors must be unlocked prior to raising ACC to V  
.
HH  
„ The ACC pin must not be at V  
for operations other than accelerated programming and  
HH  
accelerated chip erase, or device damage may result.  
„ The ACC pin must not be left floating or unconnected; inconsistent behavior of the device  
may result.  
„ t  
locks all sector if set to V ; t  
should be set to V for all other conditions.  
ACC IH  
ACC  
IL  
5.5.8 Unlock Bypass  
The device features an Unlock Bypass mode to facilitate faster word programming. Once the  
device enters the Unlock Bypass mode, only two write cycles are required to program data,  
instead of the normal four cycles.  
This mode dispenses with the initial two unlock cycles required in the standard program com-  
mand sequence, resulting in faster total programming time. The “Command Definition  
Summary” section shows the requirements for the unlock bypass command sequences.  
During the unlock bypass mode, only the Read, Unlock Bypass Program and Unlock Bypass  
Reset commands are valid. To exit the unlock bypass mode, the system must issue the two-  
cycle unlock bypass reset command sequence. The first cycle must contain the bank address  
and the data 90h. The second cycle need only contain the data 00h. The bank then returns  
to the read mode.  
Software Functions and Sample Code  
The following are C source code examples of using the unlock bypass entry, program, and exit  
functions. Refer to the Spansion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available soon on  
www.amd.com and www.fujitsu.com) for general information on Spansion Flash memory  
software development guidelines.  
Table 5.30. Unlock Bypass Entry  
(LLD Function = lld_UnlockBypassEntryCmd)  
Cycle  
Description  
Unlock  
Operation  
Write  
Write  
Write  
*/  
Byte Address  
Base + AAAh  
Base + 554h  
Base + AAAh  
Word Address  
Base + 555h  
Base + 2AAh  
Base + 555h  
Data  
1
2
3
00AAh  
0055h  
0020h  
Unlock  
Entry Command  
/* Example: Unlock Bypass Entry Command  
*( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00AA;  
*( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x2AA ) = 0x0055;  
*( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x0020;  
/* write unlock cycle 1  
/* write unlock cycle 2  
/* write unlock bypass command  
*/  
*/  
*/  
/* At this point, programming only takes two write cycles.  
/* Once you enter Unlock Bypass Mode, do a series of like  
/* operations (programming or sector erase) and then exit  
/* Unlock Bypass Mode before beginning a different type of  
/* operations.  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*/  
*/  
43  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 5.31. Unlock Bypass Program  
(LLD Function = lld_UnlockBypassProgramCmd)  
Cycle  
Description  
Operation  
Write  
Byte Address  
Base + xxxh  
Word Address  
Base +xxxh  
Data  
00A0h  
1
2
Program Setup Command  
Program Command  
Write  
Program Address  
Program Address  
Program Data  
/* Example: Unlock Bypass Program Command */  
/* Do while in Unlock Bypass Entry Mode! */  
*( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00A0;  
/* write program setup command  
/* write data to be programmed  
*/  
*/  
*( (UINT16 *)pa )  
= data;  
*/  
/* Poll until done or error.  
/* If done and more to program, */  
/* do above two cycles again. */  
Table 5.32. Unlock Bypass Reset  
(LLD Function = lld_UnlockBypassResetCmd)  
Cycle  
Description  
Reset Cycle 1  
Reset Cycle 2  
Operation  
Write  
Byte Address  
Base + xxxh  
Base + xxxh  
Word Address  
Base +xxxh  
Base +xxxh  
Data  
1
2
0090h  
0000h  
Write  
/* Example: Unlock Bypass Exit Command */  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x0090;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x0000;  
5.5.9 Write Operation Status  
The device provides several bits to determine the status of a program or erase operation. The  
following subsections describe the function of DQ1, DQ2, DQ3, DQ5, DQ6, and DQ7.  
DQ7: Data# Polling. The Data# Polling bit, DQ7, indicates to the host system whether an  
Embedded Program or Erase algorithm is in progress or completed, or whether a bank is in  
Erase Suspend. Data# Polling is valid after the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in the com-  
mand sequence. Note that the Data# Polling is valid only for the last word being programmed  
in the write-buffer-page during Write Buffer Programming. Reading Data# Polling status on  
any word other than the last word to be programmed in the write-buffer-page will return false  
status information.  
During the Embedded Program algorithm, the device outputs on DQ7 the complement of the  
datum programmed to DQ7. This DQ7 status also applies to programming during Erase Sus-  
pend. When the Embedded Program algorithm is complete, the device outputs the datum  
programmed to DQ7. The system must provide the program address to read valid status in-  
formation on DQ7. If a program address falls within a protected sector, Data# polling on DQ7  
is active for approximately t , then that bank returns to the read mode.  
PSP  
During the Embedded Erase Algorithm, Data# polling produces a “0” on DQ7. When the Em-  
bedded Erase algorithm is complete, or if the bank enters the Erase Suspend mode, Data#  
Polling produces a “1” on DQ7. The system must provide an address within any of the sectors  
selected for erasure to read valid status information on DQ7.  
After an erase command sequence is written, if all sectors selected for erasing are protected,  
Data# Polling on DQ7 is active for approximately t , then the bank returns to the read  
ASP  
mode. If not all selected sectors are protected, the Embedded Erase algorithm erases the un-  
protected sectors, and ignores the selected sectors that are protected. However, if the system  
reads DQ7 at an address within a protected sector, the status may not be valid.  
Just prior to the completion of an Embedded Program or Erase operation, DQ7 may change  
asynchronously with DQ6-DQ0 while Output Enable (OE#) is asserted low. That is, the device  
may change from providing status information to valid data on DQ7. Depending on when the  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
44  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
system samples the DQ7 output, it may read the status or valid data. Even if the device has  
completed the program or erase operation and DQ7 has valid data, the data outputs on DQ6-  
DQ0 may be still invalid. Valid data on DQ7-D00 will appear on successive read cycles.  
See the following for more information: Table 5.35, Write Operation Status, shows the out-  
puts for Data# Polling on DQ7. Figure 5.33, Write Operation Status Flowchart, shows the  
Data# Polling algorithm; and Figure 9.16, Data# Polling Timings  
(During Embedded Algorithm), shows the Data# Polling timing diagram.  
45  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
START  
Read 1  
(Note 6)  
YES  
Erase  
Operation  
Complete  
DQ7=valid  
data?  
NO  
YES  
YES  
Read 2  
Read 3  
Read 1  
DQ5=1?  
Read3=  
valid data?  
NO  
NO  
Read 2  
Read 3  
Program  
Operation  
Failed  
YES  
Write Buffer  
Programming?  
YES  
NO  
Programming  
Operation?  
NO  
Device BUSY,  
Re-Poll  
(Note 3)  
(Note 5)  
(Note 1)  
YES  
(Note 1)  
YES  
DQ6  
toggling?  
DQ6  
toggling?  
DEVICE  
ERROR  
TIMEOUT  
NO  
(Note 4)  
NO  
YES  
Read3  
DQ1=1?  
(Note 2)  
YES  
NO  
Device BUSY,  
Re-Poll  
DQ2  
toggling?  
NO  
Read 2  
Read 3  
Device BUSY,  
Re-Poll  
Erase  
Device in  
Erase/Suspend  
Mode  
Operation  
Complete  
Read3  
DQ1=1  
YES  
Write Buffer  
AND DQ7 ≠  
Valid Data?  
Operation  
Failed  
NO  
Notes:  
1) DQ6 is toggling if Read2 DQ6 does not equal Read3 DQ6.  
2) DQ2 is toggling if Read2 DQ2 does not equal Read3 DQ2.  
3) May be due to an attempt to program a 0 to 1. Use the RESET  
command to exit operation.  
Device BUSY,  
Re-Poll  
4) Write buffer error if DQ1 of last read =1.  
5) Invalid state, use RESET command to exit operation.  
6) Valid data is the data that is intended to be programmed or all 1's for  
an erase operation.  
7) Data polling algorithm valid for all operations except advanced sector  
protection.  
Figure 5.33. Write Operation Status Flowchart  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
46  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
DQ6: Toggle Bit I . Toggle Bit I on DQ6 indicates whether an Embedded Program or Erase  
algorithm is in progress or complete, or whether the device has entered the Erase Suspend  
mode. Toggle Bit I may be read at any address in the same bank, and is valid after the rising  
edge of the final WE# pulse in the command sequence (prior to the program or erase opera-  
tion), and during the sector erase time-out.  
During an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm operation, successive read cycles to any ad-  
dress cause DQ6 to toggle. When the operation is complete, DQ6 stops toggling.  
After an erase command sequence is written, if all sectors selected for erasing are protected,  
DQ6 toggles for approximately t  
[all sectors protected toggle time], then returns to read-  
ASP  
ing array data. If not all selected sectors are protected, the Embedded Erase algorithm erases  
the unprotected sectors, and ignores the selected sectors that are protected.  
The system can use DQ6 and DQ2 together to determine whether a sector is actively erasing  
or is erase-suspended. When the device is actively erasing (that is, the Embedded Erase al-  
gorithm is in progress), DQ6 toggles. When the device enters the Erase Suspend mode, DQ6  
stops toggling. However, the system must also use DQ2 to determine which sectors are eras-  
ing or erase-suspended. Alternatively, the system can use DQ7 (see the subsection on DQ7:  
Data# Polling).  
If a program address falls within a protected sector, DQ6 toggles for approximately t  
the program command sequence is written, then returns to reading array data.  
after  
PAP  
DQ6 also toggles during the erase-suspend-program mode, and stops toggling once the Em-  
bedded Program Algorithm is complete.  
See the following for additional information: Figure 5.33, Write Operation Status Flowchart;  
Figure 9.17, Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithm), and Tables 5.34 and 5.35.  
Toggle Bit I on DQ6 requires either OE# or CE# to be de-asserted and reasserted to show the  
change in state.  
DQ2: Toggle Bit II . The “Toggle Bit II” on DQ2, when used with DQ6, indicates whether a  
particular sector is actively erasing (that is, the Embedded Erase algorithm is in progress), or  
whether that sector is erase-suspended. Toggle Bit II is valid after the rising edge of the final  
WE# pulse in the command sequence. DQ2 toggles when the system reads at addresses  
within those sectors that have been selected for erasure. But DQ2 cannot distinguish whether  
the sector is actively erasing or is erase-suspended. DQ6, by comparison, indicates whether  
the device is actively erasing, or is in Erase Suspend, but cannot distinguish which sectors are  
selected for erasure. Thus, both status bits are required for sector and mode information.  
Refer to Table 5.34 to compare outputs for DQ2 and DQ6. See the following for additional in-  
formation: Figure 5.33, the “DQ6: Toggle Bit I” section, and Figures 9.16–9.19.  
47  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 5.34. DQ6 and DQ2 Indications  
If device is  
and the system reads  
then DQ6  
and DQ2  
programming,  
at any address,  
toggles,  
does not toggle.  
at an address within a sector  
selected for erasure,  
toggles,  
toggles,  
also toggles.  
does not toggle.  
toggles.  
actively erasing,  
erase suspended,  
at an address within sectors not  
selected for erasure,  
at an address within a sector  
selected for erasure,  
does not toggle,  
returns array data. The system can  
read from any sector not selected for  
erasure.  
at an address within sectors not  
returns array data,  
toggles,  
selected for erasure,  
programming in  
erase suspend  
at any address,  
is not applicable.  
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2. Whenever the system initially begins reading toggle bit sta-  
tus, it must read DQ7–DQ0 at least twice in a row to determine whether a toggle bit is  
toggling. Typically, the system would note and store the value of the toggle bit after the first  
read. After the second read, the system would compare the new value of the toggle bit with  
the first. If the toggle bit is not toggling, the device has completed the program or erases  
operation. The system can read array data on DQ7–DQ0 on the following read cycle. However,  
if after the initial two read cycles, the system determines that the toggle bit is still toggling,  
the system also should note whether the value of DQ5 is high (see the section on DQ5). If it  
is, the system should then determine again whether the toggle bit is toggling, since the toggle  
bit may have stopped toggling just as DQ5 went high. If the toggle bit is no longer toggling,  
the device has successfully completed the program or erases operation. If it is still toggling,  
the device did not complete the operation successfully, and the system must write the reset  
command to return to reading array data. The remaining scenario is that the system initially  
determines that the toggle bit is toggling and DQ5 has not gone high. The system may con-  
tinue to monitor the toggle bit and DQ5 through successive read cycles, determining the  
status as described in the previous paragraph. Alternatively, it may choose to perform other  
system tasks. In this case, the system must start at the beginning of the algorithm when it  
returns to determine the status of the operation. Refer to Figure 5.33 for more details.  
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits. DQ5 indicates whether the program or erase time has ex-  
ceeded a specified internal pulse count limit. Under these conditions DQ5 produces a “1,”  
indicating that the program or erase cycle was not successfully completed. The device may  
output a “1” on DQ5 if the system tries to program a “1” to a location that was previously  
programmed to “0.Only an erase operation can change a “0” back to a “1.” Under this con-  
dition, the device halts the operation, and when the timing limit has been exceeded, DQ5  
produces a “1.Under both these conditions, the system must write the reset command to re-  
turn to the read mode (or to the erase-suspend-read mode if a bank was previously in the  
erase-suspend-program mode).  
DQ3: Sector Erase Timeout State Indicator. After writing a sector erase command se-  
quence, the system may read DQ3 to determine whether or not erasure has begun. (The  
sector erase timer does not apply to the chip erase command.) If additional sectors are se-  
lected for erasure, the entire time-out also applies after each additional sector erase  
command. When the time-out period is complete, DQ3 switches from a “0” to a “1.If the  
time between additional sector erase commands from the system can be assumed to be less  
than t  
, the system need not monitor DQ3. See Sector Erase Command Sequence for more  
SEA  
details.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
48  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
After the sector erase command is written, the system should read the status of DQ7 (Data#  
Polling) or DQ6 (Toggle Bit I) to ensure that the device has accepted the command sequence,  
and then read DQ3. If DQ3 is “1,the Embedded Erase algorithm has begun; all further com-  
mands (except Erase Suspend) are ignored until the erase operation is complete. If DQ3 is  
“0,the device will accept additional sector erase commands. To ensure the command has  
been accepted, the system software should check the status of DQ3 prior to and following  
each sub-sequent sector erase command. If DQ3 is high on the second status check, the last  
command might not have been accepted. Table 5.35 shows the status of DQ3 relative to the  
other status bits.  
DQ1: Write to Buffer Abort. DQ1 indicates whether a Write to Buffer operation was aborted.  
Under these conditions DQ1 produces a “1. The system must issue the Write to Buffer Abort  
Reset command sequence to return the device to reading array data. See Write Buffer Pro-  
gramming Operation for more details.  
Table 5.35. Write Operation Status  
DQ7  
DQ5  
DQ2  
DQ1  
Status  
(Note 2)  
DQ6  
Toggle  
Toggle  
INVALID  
(Note 1)  
DQ3  
N/A  
(Note 2)  
(Note 4)  
Embedded Program Algorithm  
Embedded Erase Algorithm  
DQ7#  
0
0
0
No toggle  
Toggle  
0
Standard  
Mode  
1
N/A  
INVALID  
INVALID  
INVALID  
INVALID  
INVALID  
Program  
Suspend  
Mode  
Reading within Program Suspended Sector  
(Not  
Allowed)  
(Not  
Allowed)  
(Not  
Allowed)  
(Not  
Allowed)  
(Not  
Allowed)  
(Not  
Allowed)  
Reading within Non-Program Suspended  
Sector  
(Note 3)  
Data  
1
Data  
No toggle  
Data  
Data  
0
Data  
N/A  
Data  
Toggle  
Data  
Data  
N/A  
Erase  
Suspended Sector  
Erase-Suspend-  
Erase  
Suspend  
Mode  
Read  
Non-Erase Suspended  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Sector  
Erase-Suspend-Program  
BUSY State  
DQ7#  
DQ7#  
DQ7#  
DQ7#  
Toggle  
Toggle  
Toggle  
Toggle  
0
0
1
0
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
0
Write to  
Buffer  
(Note 5)  
Exceeded Timing Limits  
ABORT State  
0
1
Notes:  
1. DQ5 switches to ‘1’ when an Embedded Program or Embedded Erase operation has exceeded the maximum timing limits. Refer to the  
section on DQ5 for more information.  
2. DQ7 and DQ2 require a valid address when reading status information. Refer to the appropriate subsection for further details.  
3. Data are invalid for addresses in a Program Suspended sector.  
4. DQ1 indicates the Write to Buffer ABORT status during Write Buffer Programming operations.  
5. The data-bar polling algorithm should be used for Write Buffer Programming operations. Note that DQ7# during Write Buffer Programming  
indicates the data-bar for DQ7 data for the LAST LOADED WRITE-BUFFER ADDRESS location.  
49  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
5.6 Simultaneous Read/Write  
The simultaneous read/write feature allows the host system to read data from one bank of  
memory while programming or erasing another bank of memory. An erase operation may also  
be suspended to read from or program another location within the same bank (except the  
sector being erased). Figure 9.23, Back-to-Back Read/Write Cycle Timings, shows how read  
and write cycles may be initiated for simultaneous operation with zero latency. Refer to the  
DC Characteristics (CMOS Compatible) table for read-while-program and read-while-erase  
current specification.  
5.7 Writing Commands/Command Sequences  
When the device is configured for Asynchronous read, only Asynchronous write operations are  
allowed, and CLK is ignored. When in the Synchronous read mode configuration, the device  
is able to perform both Asynchronous and Synchronous write operations. CLK and AVD# in-  
duced address latches are supported in the Synchronous programming mode. During a  
synchronous write operation, to write a command or command sequence (which includes pro-  
gramming data to the device and erasing sectors of memory), the system must drive AVD#  
and CE# to V , and OE# to V when providing an address to the device, and drive WE# and  
IL  
IH  
CE# to V , and OE# to V when writing commands or data. During an asynchronous write  
IL  
IH  
operation, the system must drive CE# and WE# to V and OE# to V when providing an  
IL  
IH  
address, command, and data. Addresses are latched on the last falling edge of WE# or CE#,  
while data is latched on the 1st rising edge of WE# or CE#. An erase operation can erase one  
sector, multiple sectors, or the entire device. Tables 4.1–4.3 indicate the address space that  
each sector occupies. The device address space is divided into sixteen banks: Banks 1  
through 14 contain only 64 Kword sectors, while Banks 0 and 15 contain both 16 Kword boot  
sectors in addition to 64 Kword sectors. A “bank address” is the set of address bits required  
to uniquely select a bank. Similarly, a sector address” is the address bits required to uniquely  
select a sector. I  
in “DC Characteristics” represents the active current specification for the  
CC2  
write mode. “AC Characteristics-Synchronous” and “AC Characteristics-Asynchronous” con-  
tain timing specification tables and timing diagrams for write operations.  
5.8 Handshaking  
The handshaking feature allows the host system to detect when data is ready to be read by  
simply monitoring the RDY (Ready) pin, which is a dedicated output and controlled by CE#.  
When the device is configured to operate in synchronous mode, and OE# is low (active), the  
initial word of burst data becomes available after either the falling or rising edge of the RDY  
pin (depending on the setting for bit 10 in the Configuration Register). It is recommended  
that the host system set CR13–CR11 in the Configuration Register to the appropriate number  
of wait states to ensure optimal burst mode operation (see Table 5.15, Configuration  
Register).  
Bit 8 in the Configuration Register allows the host to specify whether RDY is active at the same  
time that data is ready, or one cycle before data is ready.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
50  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
5.9 Hardware Reset  
The RESET# input provides a hardware method of resetting the device to reading array data.  
When RESET# is driven low for at least a period of t , the device immediately terminates any  
RP  
operation in progress, tristates all outputs, resets the configuration register, and ignores all  
read/write commands for the duration of the RESET# pulse. The device also resets the inter-  
nal state machine to reading array data.  
To ensure data integrity the operation that was interrupted should be reinitiated once the de-  
vice is ready to accept another command sequence.  
When RESET# is held at V , the device draws CMOS standby current (I  
). If RESET# is  
SS  
CC4  
held at V , but not at V , the standby current will be greater.  
IL  
SS  
RESET# may be tied to the system reset circuitry which enables the system to read the boot-  
up firmware from the Flash memory upon a system reset.  
See Figures 9.5 and 9.12 for timing diagrams.  
5.10 Software Reset  
Software reset is part of the command set (see Table 10.1) that also returns the device to  
array read mode and must be used for the following conditions:  
1. to exit Autoselect mode  
2. when DQ5 goes high during write status operation that indicates program or erase cycle  
was not successfully completed  
3. exit sector lock/unlock operation.  
4. to return to erase-suspend-read mode if the device was previously in Erase Suspend  
mode.  
5. after any aborted operations  
Software Functions and Sample Code  
Table 5.36. Reset  
(LLD Function = lld_ResetCmd)  
Cycle  
Operation  
Byte Address  
Word Address  
Data  
Reset Command  
Write  
Base + xxxh  
Base + xxxh  
00F0h  
Note: Base = Base Address.  
The following is a C source code example of using the reset function. Refer to the Spansion  
Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available on www.amd.com and www.fujitsu.com) for general  
information on Spansion Flash memory software development guidelines.  
/* Example: Reset (software reset of Flash state machine) */  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x00F0;  
The following are additional points to consider when using the reset command:  
„ This command resets the banks to the read and address bits are ignored.  
„ Reset commands are ignored once erasure has begun until the operation is complete.  
„ Once programming begins, the device ignores reset commands until the operation is  
complete  
„ The reset command may be written between the cycles in a program command sequence  
before programming begins (prior to the third cycle). This resets the bank to which the  
system was writing to the read mode.  
51  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
„ If the program command sequence is written to a bank that is in the Erase Suspend  
mode, writing the reset command returns that bank to the erase-suspend-read mode.  
„ The reset command may be also written during an Autoselect command sequence.  
„ If a bank has entered the Autoselect mode while in the Erase Suspend mode, writing the  
reset command returns that bank to the erase-suspend-read mode.  
„ If DQ1 goes high during a Write Buffer Programming operation, the system must write  
the "Write to Buffer Abort Reset" command sequence to RESET the device to reading  
array data. The standard RESET command will not work during this condition.  
„ To exit the unlock bypass mode, the system must issue a two-cycle unlock bypass reset  
command sequence [see command table for details].  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
52  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
6 Advanced Sector Protection/Unprotection  
The Advanced Sector Protection/Unprotection feature disables or enables programming or  
erase operations in any or all sectors and can be implemented through software and/or hard-  
ware methods, which are independent of each other. This section describes the various  
methods of protecting data stored in the memory array. An overview of these methods in  
shown in Figure 6.1.  
Hardware Methods  
Software Methods  
Lock Register  
(One Time Programmable)  
ACC = V  
IL  
All sectors locked)  
Persistent Method  
(DQ1)  
Password Method  
(DQ2)  
(
WP# = V  
IL  
(All boot  
sectors locked)  
64-bit Password  
(One Time Protect)  
1. Bit is volatile, and defaults to “1” on  
reset.  
PPB Lock Bit1,2,3  
2. Programming to “0” locks all PPBs to  
their current state.  
0 = PPBs Locked  
1 = PPBs Unlocked  
3. Once programmed to “0, requires  
hardware reset to unlock.  
Persistent  
Protection Bit  
(PPB)4,5  
Dynamic  
Protection Bit  
(PPB)6,7,8  
Memory Array  
Sector 0  
PPB 0  
PPB 1  
PPB 2  
DYB 0  
DYB 1  
DYB 2  
Sector 1  
Sector 2  
Sector N-2  
Sector N-1  
PPB N-2  
PPB N-1  
PPB N  
DYB N-2  
DYB N-1  
DYB N  
Sector N3  
3. N = Highest Address Sector.  
4. 0 = Sector Protected,  
1 = Sector Unprotected.  
6. 0 = Sector Protected,  
1 = Sector Unprotected.  
5. PPBs programmed individually,  
but cleared collectively  
7. Protect effective only if PPB Lock Bit  
is unlocked and corresponding PPB  
is “1” (unprotected).  
8. Volatile Bits: defaults to user choice  
upon power-up (see ordering  
options).  
Figure 6.1. Advanced Sector Protection/Unprotection  
53  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
6.1 Lock Register  
As shipped from the factory, all devices default to the persistent mode when power is applied,  
and all sectors are unprotected, unless otherwise chosen through the DYB ordering option.  
The device programmer or host system must then choose which sector protection method to  
use. Programming (setting to “0”) any one of the following two one-time programmable, non-  
volatile bits locks the part permanently in that mode:  
„ Lock Register Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit (DQ1)  
„ Lock Register Password Protection Mode Lock Bit (DQ2)  
Table 6.1. Lock Register  
Device  
DQ15-05  
DQ4  
DQ3  
DQ2  
DQ1  
DQ0  
Password  
Protection  
Mode Lock Bit  
Persistent  
Protection  
Mode Lock Bit  
Customer  
SecSi Sector  
Protection Bit  
S29WS256N  
1
1
1
DYB Lock Boot Bit  
PPB One-Time  
0 = sectors  
power up  
protected  
Programmable Bit  
Password  
Protection  
Mode Lock Bit  
Persistent  
Protection  
Mode Lock Bit  
S29WS128N/  
S29WS064N  
0 = All PPB erase  
command disabled  
SecSi Sector  
Protection Bit  
Undefined  
1 = sectors  
power up  
unprotected  
1 = All PPB Erase  
command enabled  
For programming lock register bits refer to Table 10.2.  
Notes  
1. If the password mode is chosen, the password must be programmed before setting the cor-  
responding lock register bit.  
2. After the Lock Register Bits Command Set Entry command sequence is written, reads and  
writes for Bank 0 are disabled, while reads from other banks are allowed until exiting this  
mode.  
3. If both lock bits are selected to be programmed (to zeros) at the same time, the operation  
will abort.  
4. Once the Password Mode Lock Bit is programmed, the Persistent Mode Lock Bit is permanently  
disabled, and no changes to the protection scheme are allowed. Similarly, if the Persistent  
Mode Lock Bit is programmed, the Password Mode is permanently disabled.  
After selecting a sector protection method, each sector can operate in any of the following  
three states:  
1. Constantly locked. The selected sectors are protected and can not be reprogrammed  
unless PPB lock bit is cleared via a password, hardware reset, or power cycle.  
2. Dynamically locked. The selected sectors are protected and can be altered via software  
commands.  
3. Unlocked. The sectors are unprotected and can be erased and/or programmed.  
These states are controlled by the bit types described in Sections 6.2–6.6.  
6.2 Persistent Protection Bits  
The Persistent Protection Bits are unique and nonvolatile for each sector and have the same  
endurances as the Flash memory. Preprogramming and verification prior to erasure are han-  
dled by the device, and therefore do not require system monitoring.  
Notes  
1. Each PPB is individually programmed and all are erased in parallel.  
2. Entry command disables reads and writes for the bank selected.  
3. Reads within that bank will return the PPB status for that sector.  
4. Reads from other banks are allowed while writes are not allowed.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
54  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
5. All Reads must be performed using the Asynchronous mode.  
6. The specific sector address (A23-A14 WS256N, A22-A14 WS128N, A21-A14 WS064N)  
are written at the same time as the program command.  
7. If the PPB Lock Bit is set, the PPB Program or erase command will not execute and will  
time-out without programming or erasing the PPB.  
8. There are no means for individually erasing a specific PPB and no specific sector address  
is required for this operation.  
9. Exit command must be issued after the execution which resets the device to read mode  
and re-enables reads and writes for Bank 0  
10. The programming state of the PPB for a given sector can be verified by writing a PPB  
Status Read Command to the device as described by the flow chart below.  
6.3 Dynamic Protection Bits  
Dynamic Protection Bits are volatile and unique for each sector and can be individually mod-  
ified. DYBs only control the protection scheme for unprotected sectors that have their PPBs  
cleared (erased to “1”). By issuing the DYB Set or Clear command sequences, the DYBs will  
be set (programmed to “0”) or cleared (erased to “1”), thus placing each sector in the pro-  
tected or unprotected state respectively. This feature allows software to easily protect sectors  
against inadvertent changes yet does not prevent the easy removal of protection when  
changes are needed.  
Notes  
1. The DYBs can be set (programmed to “0”) or cleared (erased to “1”) as often as needed.  
When the parts are first shipped, the PPBs are cleared (erased to “1”) and upon power up or  
reset, the DYBs can be set or cleared depending upon the ordering option chosen.  
2. If the option to clear the DYBs after power up is chosen, (erased to “1”), then the sectors  
may be modified depending upon the PPB state of that sector (see Table 6.2).  
3. The sectors would be in the protected state If the option to set the DYBs after power up  
is chosen (programmed to “0”).  
4. It is possible to have sectors that are persistently locked with sectors that are left in the  
dynamic state.  
5. The DYB Set or Clear commands for the dynamic sectors signify protected or unpro-  
tectedstate of the sectors respectively. However, if there is a need to change the status  
of the persistently locked sectors, a few more steps are required. First, the PPB Lock Bit  
must be cleared by either putting the device through a power-cycle, or hardware reset.  
The PPBs can then be changed to reflect the desired settings. Setting the PPB Lock Bit  
once again will lock the PPBs, and the device operates normally again.  
6. To achieve the best protection, it is recommended to execute the PPB Lock Bit Set com-  
mand early in the boot code and protect the boot code by holding WP# = V . Note that  
IL  
the PPB and DYB bits have the same function when ACC = V  
as they do when ACC  
HH  
=V .  
IH  
6.4 Persistent Protection Bit Lock Bit  
The Persistent Protection Bit Lock Bit is a global volatile bit for all sectors. When set (pro-  
grammed to “0”), this bit locks all PPB and when cleared (programmed to “1”), unlocks each  
sector. There is only one PPB Lock Bit per device.  
Notes  
1. No software command sequence unlocks this bit unless the device is in the password  
protection mode; only a hardware reset or a power-up clears this bit.  
2. The PPB Lock Bit must be set (programmed to “0”) only after all PPBs are configured to  
the desired settings.  
55  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
6.5 Password Protection Method  
The Password Protection Method allows an even higher level of security than the Persistent  
Sector Protection Mode by requiring a 64 bit password for unlocking the device PPB Lock Bit.  
In addition to this password requirement, after power up and reset, the PPB Lock Bit is set  
“0” to maintain the password mode of operation. Successful execution of the Password Unlock  
command by entering the entire password clears the PPB Lock Bit, allowing for sector PPBs  
modifications.  
Notes  
1. There is no special addressing order required for programming the password. Once the  
Password is written and verified, the Password Mode Locking Bit must be set in order to  
prevent access.  
2. The Password Program Command is only capable of programming “0”s. Programming a  
“1” after a cell is programmed as a “0” results in a time-out with the cell as a “0.  
3. The password is all “1”s when shipped from the factory.  
4. All 64-bit password combinations are valid as a password.  
5. There is no means to verify what the password is after it is set.  
6. The Password Mode Lock Bit, once set, prevents reading the 64-bit password on the  
data bus and further password programming.  
7. The Password Mode Lock Bit is not erasable.  
8. The lower two address bits (A1–A0) are valid during the Password Read, Password Pro-  
gram, and Password Unlock.  
9. The exact password must be entered in order for the unlocking function to occur.  
10. The Password Unlock command cannot be issued any faster than 1 µs at a time to pre-  
vent a hacker from running through all the 64-bit combinations in an attempt to  
correctly match a password.  
11. Approximately 1 µs is required for unlocking the device after the valid 64-bit password  
is given to the device.  
12. Password verification is only allowed during the password programming operation.  
13. All further commands to the password region are disabled and all operations are  
ignored.  
14. If the password is lost after setting the Password Mode Lock Bit, there is no way to clear  
the PPB Lock Bit.  
15. Entry command sequence must be issued prior to any of any operation and it disables  
reads and writes for Bank 0. Reads and writes for other banks excluding Bank 0 are  
allowed.  
16. If the user attempts to program or erase a protected sector, the device ignores the com-  
mand and returns to read mode.  
17. A program or erase command to a protected sector enables status polling and returns  
to read mode without having modified the contents of the protected sector.  
18. The programming of the DYB, PPB, and PPB Lock for a given sector can be verified by  
writing individual status read commands DYB Status, PPB Status, and PPB Lock Status  
to the device.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
56  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Write Unlock Cycles:  
Address 555h, Data AAh  
Address 2AAh, Data 55h  
Unlock Cycle 1  
Unlock Cycle 2  
Write  
Enter Lock Register Command:  
Address 555h, Data 40h  
XXXh = Address don’t care  
Program Lock Register Data  
Address XXXh, Data A0h  
Address 77h*, Data PD  
* Not on future devices  
Program Data (PD): See text for Lock Register  
definitions  
Caution: Lock data may only be progammed once.  
Wait 4 µs  
Perform Polling Algorithm  
(see Write Operation Status  
flowchart)  
Yes  
Done?  
No  
No  
DQ5 = 1?  
Yes  
Error condition (Exceeded Timing Limits)  
PASS. Write Lock Register  
Exit Command:  
FAIL. Write rest command  
to return to reading array.  
Address XXXh, Data 90h  
Address XXXh, Data 00h  
Device returns to reading array.  
Figure 6.2. Lock Register Program Algorithm  
57  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
6.6 Advanced Sector Protection Software Examples  
Table 6.2. Sector Protection Schemes  
Unique Device PPB Lock Bit  
0 = locked  
Sector PPB  
0 = protected  
1 = unprotected  
Sector DYB  
0 = protected  
1 = unprotected  
1 = unlocked  
Sector Protection Status  
Protected through PPB  
Protected through PPB  
Unprotected  
Any Sector  
Any Sector  
Any Sector  
Any Sector  
Any Sector  
Any Sector  
Any Sector  
Any Sector  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
x
x
1
0
x
x
0
1
Protected through DYB  
Protected through PPB  
Protected through PPB  
Protected through DYB  
Unprotected  
Table 6.2 contains all possible combinations of the DYB, PPB, and PPB Lock Bit relating to the  
status of the sector. In summary, if the PPB Lock Bit is locked (set to “0”), no changes to the  
PPBs are allowed. The PPB Lock Bit can only be unlocked (reset to “1”) through a hardware  
reset or power cycle. See also Figure 6.1 for an overview of the Advanced Sector Protection  
feature.  
6.7 Hardware Data Protection Methods  
The device offers two main types of data protection at the sector level via hardware control:  
„ When WP# is at V , the four outermost sectors are locked (device specific).  
IL  
„ When ACC is at V , all sectors are locked.  
IL  
There are additional methods by which intended or accidental erasure of any sectors can be  
prevented via hardware means. The following subsections describes these methods:  
6.7.1. WP# Method  
The Write Protect feature provides a hardware method of protecting the four outermost sec-  
tors. This function is provided by the WP# pin and overrides the previously discussed Sector  
Protection/Unprotection method.  
If the system asserts V on the WP# pin, the device disables program and erase functions in  
IL  
the “outermost” boot sectors. The outermost boot sectors are the sectors containing both the  
lower and upper set of sectors in a dual-boot-configured device.  
If the system asserts V on the WP# pin, the device reverts to whether the boot sectors were  
IH  
last set to be protected or unprotected. That is, sector protection or unprotection for these  
sectors depends on whether they were last protected or unprotected.  
Note that the WP# pin must not be left floating or unconnected as inconsistent behavior of  
the device may result.  
The WP# pin must be held stable during a command sequence execution  
6.7.2 ACC Method  
This method is similar to above, except it protects all sectors. Once ACC input is set to V ,  
IL  
all program and erase functions are disabled and hence all sectors are protected.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
58  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
6.7.3 Low VCC Write Inhibit  
When V is less than V , the device does not accept any write cycles. This protects data  
CC  
LKO  
during V power-up and power-down.  
CC  
The command register and all internal program/erase circuits are disabled, and the device  
resets to reading array data. Subsequent writes are ignored until V  
is greater than V  
.
CC  
LKO  
The system must provide the proper signals to the control inputs to prevent unintentional  
writes when V is greater than V  
.
LKO  
CC  
6.7.4 Write Pulse “Glitch Protection”  
Noise pulses of less than 3 ns (typical) on OE#, CE# or WE# do not initiate a write cycle.  
6.7.5 Power-Up Write Inhibit  
If WE# = CE# = RESET# = V and OE# = V during power up, the device does not accept  
IL  
IH  
commands on the rising edge of WE#. The internal state machine is automatically reset to  
the read mode on power-up.  
59  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
7 Power Conservation Modes  
7.1 Standby Mode  
When the system is not reading or writing to the device, it can place the device in the standby  
mode. In this mode, current consumption is greatly reduced, and the outputs are placed in  
the high impedance state, independent of the OE# input. The device enters the CMOS  
standby mode when the CE# and RESET# inputs are both held at V  
± 0.2 V. The device  
CC  
requires standard access time (t ) for read access, before it is ready to read data. If the de-  
CE  
vice is deselected during erasure or programming, the device draws active current until the  
operation is completed. I  
specification  
in “DC Characteristics” represents the standby current  
CC3  
7.2 Automatic Sleep Mode  
The automatic sleep mode minimizes Flash device energy consumption while in asynchronous  
mode. the device automatically enables this mode when addresses remain stable for t  
+
ACC  
20 ns. The automatic sleep mode is independent of the CE#, WE#, and OE# control signals.  
Standard address access timings provide new data when addresses are changed. While in  
sleep mode, output data is latched and always available to the system. While in synchronous  
mode, the automatic sleep mode is disabled. Note that a new burst operation is required to  
provide new data. I  
specification.  
in “DC Characteristics” represents the automatic sleep mode current  
CC6  
7.3 Hardware RESET# Input Operation  
The RESET# input provides a hardware method of resetting the device to reading array data.  
When RESET# is driven low for at least a period of t , the device immediately terminates any  
RP  
operation in progress, tristates all outputs, resets the configuration register, and ignores all  
read/write commands for the duration of the RESET# pulse. The device also resets the inter-  
nal state machine to reading array data. The operation that was interrupted should be  
reinitiated once the device is ready to accept another command sequence to ensure data  
integrity.  
When RESET# is held at V ± 0.2 V, the device draws CMOS standby current (I  
). If RE-  
SS  
CC4  
SET# is held at V but not within V ± 0.2 V, the standby current will be greater.  
IL  
SS  
RESET# may be tied to the system reset circuitry and thus, a system reset would also reset  
the Flash memory, enabling the system to read the boot-up firmware from the Flash memory.  
7.4 Output Disable (OE#)  
When the OE# input is at V , output from the device is disabled. The outputs are placed in  
IH  
the high impedance state.  
61  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
8 SecSiTM (Secured Silicon) Sector Flash Memory Region  
The SecSi (Secured Silicon) Sector provides an extra Flash memory region that enables per-  
manent part identification through an Electronic Serial Number (ESN). The SecSi Sector is  
256 words in length that consists of 128 words for factory data and 128 words for customer-  
secured areas. All SecSi reads outside of the 256-word address range will return invalid data.  
The Factory Indicator Bit, DQ7, (at Autoselect address 03h) is used to indicate whether or not  
the Factory SecSi Sector is locked when shipped from the factory. The Customer Indicator Bit  
(DQ6) is used to indicate whether or not the Customer SecSi Sector is locked when shipped  
from the factory.  
Please note the following general conditions:  
„ While SecSi Sector access is enabled, simultaneous operations are allowed except for  
Bank 0.  
„ On power-up, or following a hardware reset, the device reverts to sending commands to  
the normal address space.  
„ Reads can be performed in the Asynchronous or Synchronous mode.  
„ Burst mode reads within SecSi Sector will wrap from address FFh back to address 00h.  
„ Reads outside of sector 0 will return memory array data.  
„ Continuous burst read past the maximum address is undefined.  
„ Sector 0 is remapped from memory array to SecSi Sector array.  
„ Once the SecSi Sector Entry Command is issued, the SecSi Sector Exit command must  
be issued to exit SecSi Sector Mode.  
„ The SecSi Sector is not accessible when the device is executing an Embedded Program  
or Embedded Erase algorithm.  
Table 8.1. SecSiTM Sector Addresses  
Sector  
Customer  
Factory  
Sector Size  
128 words  
128 words  
Address Range  
000080h-0000FFh  
000000h-00007Fh  
8.1 Factory SecSiTM Sector  
The Factory SecSi Sector is always protected when shipped from the factory and has the Fac-  
tory Indicator Bit (DQ7) permanently set to a “1. This prevents cloning of a factory locked  
part and ensures the security of the ESN and customer code once the product is shipped to  
the field.  
These devices are available pre programmed with one of the following:  
„ A random, 8 Word secure ESN only within the Factory SecSi Sector  
„ Customer code within the Customer SecSi Sector through the SpansionTM programming  
service.  
„ Both a random, secure ESN and customer code through the Spansion programming ser-  
vice.  
Customers may opt to have their code programmed through the Spansion programming ser-  
vices. Spansion programs the customer's code, with or without the random ESN. The devices  
are then shipped from the Spansion factory with the Factory SecSi Sector and Customer SecSi  
Sector permanently locked. Contact your local representative for details on using Spansion  
programming services.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
62  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
8.2 Customer SecSiTM Sector  
The Customer SecSi Sector is typically shipped unprotected (DQ6 set to “0”), allowing cus-  
tomers to utilize that sector in any manner they choose. If the security feature is not required,  
the Customer SecSi Sector can be treated as an additional Flash memory space.  
Please note the following:  
„ Once the Customer SecSi Sector area is protected, the Customer Indicator Bit will be per-  
manently set to “1.”  
„ The Customer SecSi Sector can be read any number of times, but can be programmed  
and locked only once. The Customer SecSi Sector lock must be used with caution as once  
locked, there is no procedure available for unlocking the Customer SecSi Sector area and  
none of the bits in the Customer SecSi Sector memory space can be modified in any way.  
„ The accelerated programming (ACC) and unlock bypass functions are not available when  
programming the Customer SecSi Sector, but reading in Banks 1 through 15 is available.  
„ Once the Customer SecSi Sector is locked and verified, the system must write the Exit  
SecSi Sector Region command sequence which return the device to the memory array at  
sector 0.  
8.3 SecSiTM Sector Entry and SecSi Sector Exit  
Command Sequences  
The system can access the SecSi Sector region by issuing the three-cycle Enter SecSi Sector  
command sequence. The device continues to access the SecSi Sector region until the system  
issues the four-cycle Exit SecSi Sector command sequence.  
See Command Definition Table [SecSiTM Sector Command Table, Appendix  
Table 10.1 for address and data requirements for both command sequences.  
The SecSi Sector Entry Command allows the following commands to be executed  
„ Read customer and factory SecSi areas  
„ Program the customer SecSi Sector  
After the system has written the Enter SecSi Sector command sequence, it may read the  
SecSi Sector by using the addresses normally occupied by sector SA0 within the memory ar-  
ray. This mode of operation continues until the system issues the Exit SecSi Sector command  
sequence, or until power is removed from the device.  
Software Functions and Sample Code  
The following are C functions and source code examples of using the SecSi Sector Entry, Pro-  
gram, and exit commands. Refer to the Spansion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available  
soon on www.amd.com and www.fujitsu.com) for general information on Spansion Flash  
memory software development guidelines.  
Table 8.2. SecSi Sector Entry  
(LLD Function = lld_SecSiSectorEntryCmd)  
Cycle  
Operation  
Write  
Byte Address  
Base + AAAh  
Base + 554h  
Base + AAAh  
Word Address  
Base + 555h  
Base + 2AAh  
Base + 555h  
Data  
Unlock Cycle 1  
Unlock Cycle 2  
00AAh  
0055h  
0088h  
Write  
Entry Cycle  
Write  
Note: Base = Base Address.  
/* Example: SecSi Sector Entry Command */  
63  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00AA;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x2AA ) = 0x0055;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x0088;  
/* write unlock cycle 1  
/* write unlock cycle 2  
/* write Secsi Sector Entry Cmd  
*/  
*/  
*/  
Table 8.3. SecSi Sector Program  
(LLD Function = lld_ProgramCmd)  
Cycle  
Operation  
Write  
Byte Address  
Base + AAAh  
Base + 554h  
Base + AAAh  
Word Address  
Word Address  
Base + 555h  
Base + 2AAh  
Base + 555h  
Word Address  
Data  
00AAh  
Unlock Cycle 1  
Unlock Cycle 2  
Program Setup  
Write  
0055h  
Write  
00A0h  
Program  
Write  
Data Word  
Note: Base = Base Address.  
/* Once in the SecSi Sector mode, you program */  
/* words using the programming algorithm. */  
Table 8.4. SecSi Sector Entry  
(LLD Function = lld_SecSiSectorExitCmd)  
Cycle  
Operation  
Write  
Byte Address  
Base + AAAh  
Base + 554h  
Base + AAAh  
Word Address  
Base + 555h  
Base + 2AAh  
Base + 555h  
Data  
Unlock Cycle 1  
Unlock Cycle 2  
00AAh  
0055h  
0090h  
Write  
Exit Cycle  
Write  
Note: Base = Base Address.  
/* Example: SecSi Sector Exit Command */  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x00AA;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x2AA ) = 0x0055;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x0090;  
*( (UINT16 *)base_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x0000;  
/* write unlock cycle 1  
/* write unlock cycle 2  
/* write SecSi Sector Exit cycle 3 */  
/* write SecSi Sector Exit cycle 4 */  
*/  
*/  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
64  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
9 Electrical Specifications  
9.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Storage Temperature  
Plastic Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .–65°C to +150°C  
Ambient Temperature  
with Power Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .–65°C to +125°C  
Voltage with Respect to Ground:  
All Inputs and I/Os except  
as noted below (Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.5 V to VIO + 0.5 V  
VCC (Note 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.5 V to +2.5 V  
VIO  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.5 V to +2.5 V  
ACC (Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.5 V to +9.5 V  
Output Short Circuit Current (Note 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mA  
Notes:  
1. Minimum DC voltage on input or I/Os is –0.5 V. During voltage transitions, inputs or  
I/Os may undershoot VSS to –2.0 V for periods of up to 20 ns. See Figure 9.1.  
Maximum DC voltage on input or I/Os is VCC + 0.5 V. During voltage transitions  
outputs may overshoot to VCC + 2.0 V for periods up to 20 ns. See Figure 9.2.  
2. Minimum DC input voltage on pin ACC is -0.5V. During voltage transitions, ACC may  
overshoot VSS to –2.0 V for periods of up to 20 ns. See Figure 9.1. Maximum DC  
voltage on pin ACC is +9.5 V, which may overshoot to 10.5 V for periods up to 20 ns.  
3. No more than one output may be shorted to ground at a time. Duration of the short  
circuit should not be greater than one second.  
4. Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent  
damage to the device. This is a stress rating only; functional operation of the device at  
these or any other conditions above those indicated in the operational sections of this  
data sheet is not implied. Exposure of the device to absolute maximum rating conditions  
for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
20 ns  
20 ns  
20 ns  
VCC  
+0.8 V  
+2.0 V  
VCC  
+0.5 V  
–0.5 V  
–2.0 V  
1.0 V  
20 ns  
20 ns  
20 ns  
Figure 9.1. Maximum Negative Overshoot  
Waveform  
Figure 9.2. Maximum Positive Overshoot  
Waveform  
65  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
9.2 Operating Ranges  
Wireless (W) Devices  
Ambient Temperature (TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –25°C to +85°C  
Industrial (I) Devices  
Ambient Temperature (TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –40°C to +85°C  
Supply Voltages  
VCC Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +1.70 V to +1.95 V  
VIO Supply Voltages: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +1.70 V to +1.95 V  
(Contact local sales office for VIO = 1.35 to +1.70 V.)  
Notes: Operating ranges define those limits between which the functionality of the device  
is guaranteed.  
9.3 Test Conditions  
Device  
Under  
Test  
C
L
Figure 9.3. Test Setup  
Table 9.1. Test Specifications  
Test Condition  
All Speed Options  
Unit  
Output Load Capacitance, CL  
(including jig capacitance)  
30  
pF  
3.0 @ 54, 66 MHz  
2.5 @ 80 MHz  
Input Rise and Fall Times  
Input Pulse Levels  
ns  
0.0–VIO  
VIO/2  
V
V
Input timing measurement  
reference levels  
Output timing measurement  
reference levels  
VIO/2  
V
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
66  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
9.4 Key to Switching Waveforms  
WAVEFORM  
INPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
Steady  
Changing from H to L  
Changing from L to H  
Don’t Care, Any Change Permitted  
Does Not Apply  
Changing, State Unknown  
Center Line is High Impedance State (High Z)  
9.5 Switching Waveforms  
VIO  
All Inputs and Outputs  
VIO/2  
VIO/2  
Input  
Measurement Level  
Output  
0.0 V  
Figure 9.4. Input Waveforms and Measurement Levels  
9.6 VCC Power-up  
Parameter  
Description  
VCC Setup Time  
Test Setup  
Speed  
Unit  
ms  
tVCS  
Notes:  
Min  
1
1. VCC >= VIO - 100mV and VCC ramp rate is > 1V / 100µs  
2. VCC ramp rate <1V / 100µs, a Hardware Reset will be required.  
tVCS  
VCC  
VIO  
RESET#  
Figure 9.5. VCC Power-up Diagram  
67  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
9.7 DC Characteristics (CMOS Compatible)  
Parameter  
Description (Notes)  
Input Load Current  
Output Leakage Current (3)  
Test Conditions (Notes 1, 2, 9)  
= V to V , V = V max  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
±1  
±1  
54  
60  
66  
48  
54  
60  
42  
48  
54  
36  
42  
48  
30  
36  
18  
4
Unit  
µA  
I
V
V
LI  
IN  
SS  
CC  
CC  
CC  
I
= V to V , V = V max  
µA  
LO  
OUT  
SS  
CC  
CC  
CC  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
80 MHz  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
80 MHz  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
80 MHz  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
80 MHz  
27  
28  
30  
28  
30  
32  
29  
32  
34  
32  
35  
38  
20  
27  
13  
3
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
µA  
CE# = V , OE# = V , WE#  
IL  
IH  
= V , burst length = 8  
IH  
CE# = V , OE# = V , WE#  
IL  
IH  
= V , burst length = 16  
IH  
I
V
Active burst Read Current  
CCB  
CC  
CE# = V , OE# = V , WE#  
IL  
IH  
= V , burst length = 32  
IH  
CE# = V , OE# = V , WE#  
IL  
IH  
= V , burst length =  
IH  
Continuous  
I
V
V
Non-active Output  
OE# = V  
IH  
IO1  
IO  
10 MHz  
5 MHz  
1 MHz  
mA  
mA  
mA  
µA  
Active Asynchronous  
CE# = V , OE# = V , WE#  
CC  
IL  
IH  
I
CC1  
= V  
Read Current (4)  
IH  
V
1
5
ACC  
CE# = V , OE# = V , ACC  
IL  
IH  
I
I
V
V
Active Write Current (5)  
Standby Current (6, 7)  
CC2  
CC  
CC  
= V  
IH  
V
19  
1
52.5  
5
mA  
µA  
CC  
V
ACC  
CE# = RESET# =  
± 0.2 V  
CC3  
V
CC  
V
20  
70  
40  
150  
µA  
CC  
I
I
I
V
V
Reset Current (7)  
Active Current  
RESET# = V CLK = V  
IL  
µA  
CC4  
CC5  
CC6  
CC  
IL,  
CC  
CE# = V , OE# = V , ACC = V  
50  
60  
mA  
IL  
IH  
IH  
(Read While Write) (7)  
V
Sleep Current (7)  
CE# = V , OE# = V  
2
6
40  
20  
µA  
mA  
mA  
V
CC  
IL  
IH  
V
CE# = V , OE# = V  
ACC  
IL  
IH,  
I
Accelerated Program Current (8)  
ACC  
V
= 9.5 V  
ACC  
V
14  
20  
CC  
V
Input Low Voltage  
V
V
= 1.8 V  
= 1.8 V  
–0.5  
0.4  
IL  
IO  
IO  
V
Input High Voltage  
V
– 0.4  
V
+ 0.4  
V
IH  
IO  
IO  
V
Output Low Voltage  
I
I
= 100 µA, V = V  
= V  
IO  
0.1  
V
OL  
OH  
HH  
OL  
OH  
CC  
CC min  
V
V
Output High Voltage  
Voltage for Accelerated Program  
= –100 µA, V = V  
= V  
V – 0.1  
IO  
V
CC  
CC min  
IO  
8.5  
1.0  
9.5  
1.4  
V
V
Low V Lock-out Voltage  
V
LKO  
CC  
Notes:  
1. Maximum ICC specifications are tested with VCC = VCCmax.  
2. VCC= VIO  
3. CE# must be set high when measuring the RDY pin.  
4. The ICC current listed is typically less than 3 mA/MHz, with OE# at VIH  
5. ICC active while Embedded Erase or Embedded Program is in progress.  
6. Device enters automatic sleep mode when addresses are stable for tACC + 20 ns.  
.
.
Typical sleep mode current is equal to ICC3  
.
7. VIH = VCC ± 0.2 V and VIL > –0.1 V.  
8. Total current during accelerated programming is the sum of VACC and VCC  
currents.  
9. VACC = VHH on ACC input.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
68  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
9.8 AC Characteristics  
9.8.1. CLK Characterization  
Parameter  
Description  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
66  
80 MHz  
80  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
fCLK  
CLK Frequency  
Max  
Min  
54  
tCLK  
tCH  
CLK Period  
18.5  
15.1  
12.5  
CLK High Time  
CLK Low Time  
CLK Rise Time  
CLK Fall Time  
Min  
7.4  
3
6.1  
3
5.0  
2.5  
ns  
ns  
tCL  
tCR  
Max  
tCF  
t
CLK  
t
t
CH  
CL  
CLK  
t
t
CF  
CR  
Figure 9.6. CLK Characterization  
69  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
9.8.2 Synchronous/Burst Read  
Parameter  
JEDEC  
Standard  
tIACC  
tBACC  
tACS  
tACH  
tBDH  
tCR  
Description  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
69  
80 MHz  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Latency  
Max  
Burst Access Time Valid Clock to Output Delay Max  
13.5  
5
11.2  
9
Address Setup Time to CLK (Note 1)  
Address Hold Time from CLK (Note 1)  
Data Hold Time from Next Clock Cycle  
Chip Enable to RDY Valid  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Max  
4
6
3
7
4
13.5  
13.5  
11.2  
9
tOE  
Output Enable to Output Valid  
Chip Enable to High Z (Note 2)  
Output Enable to High Z (Note 2)  
CE# Setup Time to CLK  
11.2  
tCEZ  
10  
10  
4
tOEZ  
tCES  
tRDYS  
tRACC  
tCAS  
RDY Setup Time to CLK  
5
4
3.5  
9
Ready Access Time from CLK  
CE# Setup Time to AVD#  
AVD# Low to CLK  
13.5  
11.2  
0
tAVC  
tAVD  
tAOE  
4
AVD# Pulse  
8
AVD Low to OE# Low  
38.4  
Notes:  
1. Addresses are latched on the first rising edge of CLK.  
2. Not 100% tested.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
70  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
9.8.3 Timing Diagrams  
5 cycles for initial access shown.  
18.5 ns typ. (54 MHz)  
tCEZ  
tCES  
CE#  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CLK  
tAVC  
AVD#  
tAVD  
tACS  
Addresses  
Data (n)  
Aa  
tBACC  
tACH  
Hi-Z  
tIACC  
Da  
Da + 1  
Da + 2  
Da + n  
tOEZ  
Da + 3  
tAOE  
tBDH  
OE#  
tRACC  
tOE  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
RDY (n)  
tCR  
tRDYS  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Data (n + 1)  
RDY (n + 1)  
Da  
Da + 1  
Da + 2  
Da + n  
Da + 2  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Data (n + 2)  
RDY (n + 2)  
Da  
Da + 1  
Da + 1  
Da + n  
Da + 1  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Data (n + 3)  
Da  
Da  
Da  
Da + n  
Da  
Hi-Z  
RDY (n + 3)  
Notes:  
1. Figure shows total number of wait states set to five cycles. The total number of  
wait states can be programmed from two cycles to seven cycles.  
2. If any burst address occurs at “address + 1”, “address + 2”, or “address + 3”,  
additional clock delay cycles are inserted, and are indicated by RDY.  
3. The device is in synchronous mode.  
Figure 9.7. CLK Synchronous Burst Mode Read  
71  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
7 cycles for initial access shown.  
tCES  
CE#  
CLK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
tAVC  
AVD#  
tAVD  
tACS  
Ac  
Addresses  
Data  
tBACC  
tACH  
tIACC  
DC  
DD  
DE  
DF  
D8  
DB  
tBDH  
tAOE  
OE#  
RDY  
tCR  
tRACC  
tRACC  
tOE  
Hi-Z  
tRDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure shows total number of wait states set to seven cycles. The total number of wait states can be programmed from two cycles to seven  
cycles.  
2. If any burst address occurs at “address + 1”, “address + 2”, or “address + 3”, additional clock delay cycles are inserted, and are indicated  
by RDY.  
3. The device is in synchronous mode with wrap around.  
4. D8–DF in data waveform indicate the order of data within a given 8-word address range, from lowest to highest. Starting address in figure  
is the 4th address in range (0-F).  
Figure 9.8. 8-word Linear Burst with Wrap Around  
7 cycles for initial access shown.  
tCES  
CE#  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CLK  
tAVC  
AVD#  
tAVD  
tACS  
Ac  
Addresses  
Data  
tBACC  
tACH  
tIACC  
DC  
DD  
DE  
DF  
D10  
D13  
tAOE  
tBDH  
OE#  
RDY  
tCR  
tRACC  
tRACC  
tOE  
Hi-Z  
tRDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure shows total number of wait states set to seven cycles. The total number of wait states can be programmed from two cycles to seven  
cycles. Clock is set for active rising edge.  
2. If any burst address occurs at “address + 1”, “address + 2”, or “address + 3”, additional clock delay cycles are inserted, and are indicated  
by RDY.  
3. The device is in asynchronous mode with out wrap around.  
4. DC–D13 in data waveform indicate the order of data within a given 8-word address range, from lowest to highest. Starting address in figure  
is the 1st address in range (c-13).  
Figure 9.9. 8-word Linear Burst without Wrap Around  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
72  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
tCEZ  
6 wait cycles for initial access shown.  
tCES  
CE#  
CLK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
tAVC  
AVD#  
tAVD  
tACS  
Aa  
Addresses  
Data  
tBACC  
tACH  
Hi-Z  
tIACC  
Da  
Da+1  
Da+2  
Da+3  
Da + n  
tBDH  
tAOE  
tOEZ  
tRACC  
OE#  
RDY  
tCR  
tOE  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
tRDYS  
Notes:  
1. Figure assumes 6 wait states for initial access and synchronous read.  
2. The Set Configuration Register command sequence has been written with CR8=0; device will output RDY one  
cycle before valid data.  
Figure 9.10. Linear Burst with RDY Set One Cycle Before Data  
9.8.4 AC Characteristics—Asynchronous Read  
Parameter  
80  
MHz  
JEDEC Standard  
Description  
Access Time from CE# Low  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tCE  
tACC  
Max  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Min  
70  
70  
8
Asynchronous Access Time  
tAVDP  
tAAVDS  
tAAVDH  
tOE  
AVD# Low Time  
Address Setup Time to Rising Edge of AVD#  
Address Hold Time from Rising Edge of AVD#  
Output Enable to Output Valid  
4
7
6
13.5  
11.2  
Read  
0
10  
10  
0
tOEH  
Output Enable Hold Time  
Toggle and Data# Polling  
tOEZ  
tCAS  
Output Enable to High Z (see Note)  
CE# Setup Time to AVD#  
Note: Not 100% tested.  
73  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
CE#  
OE#  
tOE  
tOEH  
WE#  
Data  
tCE  
tOEZ  
Valid RD  
tACC  
RA  
Addresses  
AVD#  
tAAVDH  
tCAS  
tAVDP  
tAAVDS  
Note: RA = Read Address, RD = Read Data.  
Figure 9.11. Asynchronous Mode Read  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
74  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
9.8.5 Hardware Reset (RESET#)  
Parameter  
JEDEC Std.  
Description  
All Speed Options  
Unit  
µs  
tRP  
RESET# Pulse Width  
Reset High Time Before Read (See Note)  
Min  
Min  
30  
tRH  
200  
ns  
Note: Not 100% tested.  
CE#, OE#  
tRH  
RESET#  
tRP  
Figure 9.12. Reset Timings  
75  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
9.8.6 Erase/Program Timing  
Parameter  
JEDEC Standard  
Description  
54 MHz  
66 MHz  
80 MHz Unit  
t
t
Write Cycle Time (Note 1)  
Min  
Min  
70  
5
ns  
ns  
ns  
AVAV  
WC  
Synchronous  
Asynchronous  
Synchronous  
Asynchronous  
t
t
Address Setup Time (Notes 2, 3)  
Address Hold Time (Notes 2, 3)  
AVWL  
WLAX  
AS  
0
9
t
t
Min  
ns  
AH  
20  
8
t
AVD# Low Time  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Typ  
Typ  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
µs  
µs  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
AVDP  
t
t
t
Data Setup Time  
45  
20  
DVWH  
DS  
DH  
t
Data Hold Time  
0
0
WHDX  
t
t
Read Recovery Time Before Write  
CE# Setup Time to AVD#  
CE# Hold Time  
GHWL  
GHWL  
t
0
CAS  
t
t
0
WHEH  
WLWH  
WHWL  
CH  
t
t
t
Write Pulse Width  
30  
20  
0
WP  
t
Write Pulse Width High  
WPH  
t
Latency Between Read and Write Operations  
SR/W  
t
V
V
V
Rise and Fall Time  
500  
1
VID  
ACC  
ACC  
t
Setup Time (During Accelerated Programming)  
VIDS  
t
Setup Time  
CC  
50  
5
VCS  
t
t
CE# Setup Time to WE#  
ELWL  
CS  
t
AVD# Setup Time to WE#  
5
AVSW  
AVHW  
t
AVD# Hold Time to WE#  
5
t
AVD# Setup Time to CLK  
5
AVSC  
t
AVD# Hold Time to CLK  
5
AVHC  
t
Clock Setup Time to WE#  
5
CSW  
t
Noise Pulse Margin on WE#  
Sector Erase Accept Time-out  
Erase Suspend Latency  
3
WEP  
t
50  
20  
20  
100  
1
SEA  
t
ESL  
PSL  
ASP  
t
Program Suspend Latency  
t
Toggle Time During Sector Protection  
Toggle Time During Programming Within a Protected Sector  
t
PSP  
Notes:  
1. Not 100% tested.  
2. Asynchronous read mode allows Asynchronous program operation only. Synchronous read mode allows both Asynchronous and  
Synchronous program operation.  
3. In asynchronous program operation timing, addresses are latched on the falling edge of WE#. In synchronous program operation timing,  
addresses are latched on the rising edge of CLK.  
4. See the “Erase and Programming Performance” section for more information.  
5. Does not include the preprogramming time.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
76  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Erase Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
Read Status Data  
V
IH  
CLK  
V
IL  
tAVDP  
AVD#  
tAH  
tAS  
SA  
VA  
VA  
Addresses  
Data  
2AAh  
555h for  
chip erase  
10h for  
chip erase  
In  
Complete  
55h  
30h  
Progress  
tDS  
tDH  
CE#  
tCH  
OE#  
WE#  
tWP  
tWHWH2  
tCS  
tWPH  
tWC  
tVCS  
VCC  
Figure 9.2. Chip/Sector Erase Operation Timings: WE# Latched Addresses  
77  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
Read Status Data  
V
IH  
CLK  
AVD  
V
IL  
tAVSW  
tAVHW  
tAVDP  
tAS  
tAH  
Addresses  
Data  
555h  
PA  
VA  
VA  
In  
A0h  
tDS  
Complete  
PD  
Progress  
tCAS  
tDH  
CE#  
tCH  
OE#  
WE#  
tWP  
tWHWH1  
tCS  
tWPH  
tWC  
tVCS  
VCC  
Notes:  
1. PA = Program Address, PD = Program Data, VA = Valid Address for reading status bits.  
2. “In progress” and “complete” refer to status of program operation.  
3. A23–A14 for the WS256N (A22–A14 for the WS128N, A21–A14 for the WS064N) are don’t care during  
command sequence unlock cycles.  
4. CLK can be either V or V .  
IL  
IH  
5. The Asynchronous programming operation is independent of the Set Device Read Mode bit in the  
Configuration Register.  
Figure 9.13. Asynchronous Program Operation Timings: WE# Latched Addresses  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
78  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)  
tAVCH  
Read Status Data  
CLK  
AVD  
tAS  
tAH  
tAVSC  
tAVDP  
Addresses  
Data  
PA  
VA  
VA  
555h  
In  
Complete  
A0h  
PD  
tDS  
tDH  
Progress  
tCAS  
CE#  
tCH  
OE#  
WE#  
tCSW  
tWP  
tWHWH1  
tWPH  
tWC  
tVCS  
VCC  
Notes:  
1. PA = Program Address, PD = Program Data, VA = Valid Address for reading status bits.  
2. “In progress” and “complete” refer to status of program operation.  
3. A23–A14 for the WS256N (A22–A14 for the WS128N, A21–A14 for the WS064N) are don’t care during  
command sequence unlock cycles.  
4. Addresses are latched on the first rising edge of CLK.  
5. Either CE# or AVD# is required to go from low to high in between programming command sequences.  
6. The Synchronous programming operation is dependent of the Set Device Read Mode bit in the Configuration  
Register. The Configuration Register must be set to the Synchronous Read Mode.  
Figure 9.14. Synchronous Program Operation Timings: CLK Latched Addresses  
79  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
CE#  
AVD#  
WE#  
Addresses  
Data  
PA  
Don't Care  
A0h  
Don't Care  
PD  
Don't Care  
OE#  
ACC  
tVIDS  
V
V
ID  
tVID  
or V  
IL  
IH  
Note: Use setup and hold times from conventional program operation.  
Figure 9.15. Accelerated Unlock Bypass Programming Timing  
AVD#  
CE#  
tCEZ  
tCE  
tOEZ  
tCH  
tOE  
OE#  
WE#  
tOEH  
tACC  
High Z  
Addresses  
VA  
VA  
High Z  
Status Data  
Status Data  
Data  
Notes:  
1. Status reads in figure are shown as asynchronous.  
2. VA = Valid Address. Two read cycles are required to determine status. When the Embedded Algorithm operation is complete, and Data#  
Polling will output true data.  
Figure 9.16. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithm)  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
80  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AVD#  
CE#  
tCEZ  
tCE  
tOEZ  
tCH  
tOE  
OE#  
WE#  
tOEH  
tACC  
VA  
High Z  
High Z  
Addresses  
Data  
VA  
Status Data  
Status Data  
Notes:  
1. Status reads in figure are shown as asynchronous.  
2. VA = Valid Address. Two read cycles are required to determine status. When the Embedded Algorithm operation is complete, the toggle bits  
will stop toggling.  
Figure 9.17. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithm)  
CE#  
CLK  
AVD#  
Addresses  
OE#  
VA  
VA  
tIACC  
tIACC  
Data  
Status Data  
Status Data  
RDY  
Notes:  
1. The timings are similar to synchronous read timings.  
2. VA = Valid Address. Two read cycles are required to determine status. When the Embedded Algorithm operation is complete, the toggle bits  
will stop toggling.  
3. RDY is active with data (D8 = 1 in the Configuration Register). When D8 = 0 in the Configuration Register, RDY is active one clock cycle before  
data.  
Figure 9.18. Synchronous Data Polling Timings/Toggle Bit Timings  
81  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Enter  
Embedded  
Erasing  
Erase  
Suspend  
Enter Erase  
Suspend Program  
Erase  
Resume  
Erase  
Erase Suspend  
Read  
Erase  
Suspend  
Program  
Erase  
Complete  
WE#  
Erase  
Erase Suspend  
Read  
DQ6  
DQ2  
Note: DQ2 toggles only when read at an address within an erase-suspended sector. The system may use OE# or CE#  
to toggle DQ2 and DQ6.  
Figure 9.19. DQ2 vs. DQ6  
Address boundary occurs every 128 words, beginning at address  
00007Fh: (0000FFh, 00017Fh, etc.) Address 000000h is also a boundary crossing.  
C124  
C125  
7D  
C126  
7E  
C127  
7F  
C127  
7F  
C128  
80  
C129  
81  
C130  
82  
C131  
83  
CLK  
7C  
Address (hex)  
(stays high)  
AVD#  
tRACC  
tRACC  
RDY(1)  
latency  
tRACC  
tRACC  
RDY(2)  
Data  
latency  
D124  
D125  
D126  
D127  
D128  
D129  
D130  
OE#,  
CE#  
(stays low)  
Notes:  
1. RDY(1) active with data (D8 = 1 in the Configuration Register).  
2. RDY(2) active one clock cycle before data (D8 = 0 in the Configuration Register).  
3. Cxx indicates the clock that triggers Dxx on the outputs; for example, C60 triggers D60.  
4. Figure shows the device not crossing a bank in the process of performing an erase or program.  
5. RDY will not go low and no additional wait states will be required if the Burst frequency is <=66 MHz and the Boundary Crossing bit (D14)  
in the Configuration Register is set to 0  
Figure 9.20. Latency with Boundary Crossing when Frequency > 66 MHz  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
82  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Address boundary occurs every 128 words, beginning at address  
00007Fh: (0000FFh, 00017Fh, etc.) Address 000000h is also a boundary crossing.  
C124  
C125  
7D  
C126  
7E  
C127  
7F  
C127  
7F  
CLK  
7C  
Address (hex)  
(stays high)  
AVD#  
tRACC  
tRACC  
RDY(1)  
latency  
tRACC  
tRACC  
RDY(2)  
Data  
latency  
D124  
D125  
D126  
D127  
Read Status  
OE#,  
CE#  
(stays low)  
Notes:  
1. RDY(1) active with data (D8 = 1 in the Configuration Register).  
2. RDY(2) active one clock cycle before data (D8 = 0 in the Configuration Register).  
3. Cxx indicates the clock that triggers Dxx on the outputs; for example, C60 triggers D60.  
4. Figure shows the device crossing a bank in the process of performing an erase or program.  
5. RDY will not go low and no additional wait states will be required if the Burst frequency is < 66 MHz and the Boundary Crossing bit (D14) in  
the Configuration Register is set to 0.  
Figure 9.21. Latency with Boundary Crossing into Program/Erase Bank  
83  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Data  
D0  
D1  
Rising edge of next clock cycle  
following last wait state triggers  
next burst data  
AVD#  
OE#  
total number of clock cycles  
following addresses being latched  
1
2
0
3
1
4
5
6
4
7
5
CLK  
2
3
number of clock cycles  
programmed  
Wait State Configuration Register Setup:  
D13, D12, D11 = “111” Reserved  
D13, D12, D11 = “110” Reserved  
D13, D12, D11 = “101” 5 programmed, 7 total  
D13, D12, D11 = “100” 4 programmed, 6 total  
D13, D12, D11 = “011” 3 programmed, 5 total  
D13, D12, D11 = “010” 2 programmed, 4 total  
D13, D12, D11 = “001” 1 programmed, 3 total  
D13, D12, D11 = “000” 0 programmed, 2 total  
Note: Figure assumes address D0 is not at an address boundary, and wait state is set to “101”.  
Figure 9.22. Example of Wait States Insertion  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
84  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Last Cycle in  
Program or  
Sector Erase  
Read status (at least two cycles) in same bank  
and/or array data from other bank  
Begin another  
write or program  
command sequence  
Command Sequence  
tWC  
tRC  
tRC  
tWC  
CE#  
OE#  
tOE  
tGHWL  
tOEH  
WE#  
Data  
tWPH  
tOEZ  
tWP  
tDS  
tACC  
tOEH  
tDH  
PD/30h  
RD  
RD  
AAh  
tSR/W  
RA  
Addresses  
AVD#  
PA/SA  
tAS  
RA  
555h  
tAH  
Note: Breakpoints in waveforms indicate that system may alternately read array data from the “non-busy bank” while  
checking the status of the program or erase operation in the “busy” bank. The system should read status twice to ensure  
valid information.  
Figure 9.23. Back-to-Back Read/Write Cycle Timings  
85  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
9.8.7 Erase and Programming Performance  
Parameter  
Typ (Note 1)  
0.6  
Max (Note 2)  
Unit  
Comments  
64 Kword  
16 Kword  
VCC  
VCC  
3.5  
2
Sector Erase Time  
s
<0.15  
153.6 (WS256N)  
77.4 (WS128N)  
39.3 (WS064N)  
308 (WS256N)  
154 (WS128N)  
78 (WS064N)  
Excludes 00h  
programming prior  
to erasure (Note 4)  
VCC  
Chip Erase Time  
s
130.6 (WS256N)  
65.8 (WS128N)  
33.4 (WS064N)  
262 (WS256N)  
132 (WS128N)  
66 (WS064N)  
ACC  
VCC  
ACC  
VCC  
ACC  
VCC  
ACC  
40  
24  
400  
240  
94  
Single Word Programming Time  
(Note 8)  
µs  
µs  
µs  
9.4  
6
Effective Word Programming Time  
utilizing Program Write Buffer  
60  
300  
192  
3000  
1920  
Total 32-Word Buffer Programming  
Time  
157.3 (WS256N)  
78.6 (WS128N)  
39.3 (WS064N)  
314.6 (WS256N)  
157.3 (WS128N)  
78.6 (WS064N)  
VCC  
Excludes system  
level overhead  
(Note 5)  
Chip Programming Time (Note 3)  
s
100.7 (WS256N)  
50.3 (WS128N)  
25.2 (WS064N)  
201.3 (WS256N)  
100.7 (WS128N)  
50.3 (WS064N)  
ACC  
Notes:  
1. Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, 1.8 V VCC, 10,000  
cycles; checkerboard data pattern.  
2. Under worst case conditions of 90°C, VCC = 1.70 V, 100,000 cycles.  
3. Typical chip programming time is considerably less than the maximum chip programming  
time listed, and is based on single word programming.  
4. In the pre-programming step of the Embedded Erase algorithm, all words are programmed  
to 00h before erasure.  
5. System-level overhead is the time required to execute the two- or four-bus-cycle sequence  
for the program command. See the Appendix for further information on command  
definitions.  
6. Contact the local sales office for minimum cycling endurance values in specific applications  
and operating conditions.  
7. Refer to Application Note “Erase Suspend/Resume Timing” for more details.  
8. Word programming specification is based upon a single word programming operation not  
utilizing the write buffer.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
86  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
9.8.8 BGA Ball Capacitance  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Parameter Description  
Input Capacitance  
Test Setup  
VIN = 0  
Typ.  
5.3  
5.8  
6.3  
Max  
6.3  
6.8  
7.3  
Unit  
pF  
CIN  
COUT  
CIN2  
Output Capacitance  
VOUT = 0  
VIN = 0  
pF  
Control Pin Capacitance  
pF  
Notes:  
1. Sampled, not 100% tested.  
2. Test conditions TA = 25°C; f = 1.0 MHz.  
87  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
10 Appendix  
This section contains information relating to software control or interfacing with the Flash de-  
vice. For additional information and assistance regarding software, see the Additional  
Resources section on page 18, or explore the Web at www.amd.com and www.fujitsu.com.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
88  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 10.1. Memory Array Commands  
Bus Cycles (Notes 1–5)  
Third Fourth  
Addr  
First  
Addr  
Second  
Fifth  
Addr  
Sixth  
Addr Data  
Command Sequence  
(Notes)  
Data  
RD  
Addr  
Data  
Data  
Addr  
Data  
Data  
Asynchronous Read (6)  
Reset (7)  
Manufacturer ID  
1
1
4
6
RA  
XXX  
555  
555  
F0  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
[BA]555  
[BA]555  
90  
90  
[BA]X00  
[BA]X01  
0001  
227E  
Device ID (9)  
AA  
BA+X0E  
PA  
Data  
PD  
BA+X0F 2200  
Indicator Bits (10)  
4
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
[BA]555  
90  
[BA]X03  
Data  
Program  
4
6
1
3
6
6
1
1
4
4
1
3
2
1
555  
555  
SA  
AA  
AA  
29  
AA  
AA  
AA  
B0  
30  
AA  
AA  
98  
AA  
A0  
98  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
PA  
A0  
25  
PA  
PA  
PD  
Write to Buffer (11)  
Program Buffer to Flash  
Write to Buffer Abort Reset (12)  
Chip Erase  
WC  
WBL  
PD  
555  
555  
555  
BA  
2AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
55  
555  
555  
555  
F0  
80  
80  
555  
555  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
SA  
10  
30  
Sector Erase  
Erase/Program Suspend (13)  
Erase/Program Resume (14)  
Set Configuration Register (18)  
Read Configuration Register  
CFI Query (15)  
BA  
555  
555  
[BA]555  
555  
XXX  
XXX  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
D0  
C6  
X00  
X00  
CR  
CR  
Entry  
2AA  
PA  
55  
PD  
555  
20  
Program (16)  
CFI (16)  
Reset  
2
XXX  
90  
XXX  
00  
Entry  
3
4
1
555  
555  
00  
AA  
AA  
2AA  
2AA  
55  
55  
555  
555  
88  
A0  
Program (17)  
Read (17)  
PA  
PD  
00  
Data  
Exit (17)  
4
555  
AA  
2AA  
55  
555  
90  
XXX  
Legend:  
X = Don’t care.  
RA = Read Address.  
RD = Read Data.  
PA = Program Address. Addresses latch on the rising edge of the  
AVD# pulse or active edge of CLK, whichever occurs first.  
SA = Sector Address. WS256N = A23–A14; WS128N = A22–A14;  
WS064N = A21–A14.  
BA = Bank Address. WS256N = A23–A20; WS128N = A22–A20;  
WS064N = A21–A18.  
CR = Configuration Register data bits D15–D0.  
WBL = Write Buffer Location. Address must be within the same write  
buffer page as PA.  
PD = Program Data. Data latches on the rising edge of WE# or CE#  
pulse, whichever occurs first.  
WC = Word Count. Number of write buffer locations to load minus 1.  
Notes:  
1. See Table 5.4 for description of bus operations.  
2. All values are in hexadecimal.  
3. Shaded cells indicate read cycles.  
4. Address and data bits not specified in table, legend, or notes are  
don’t cares (each hex digit implies 4 bits of data).  
5. Writing incorrect address and data values or writing them in the  
improper sequence may place the device in an unknown state.  
The system must write the reset command to return the device  
to reading array data.  
6. No unlock or command cycles required when bank is reading  
array data.  
7. Reset command is required to return to reading array data (or to  
the erase-suspend-read mode if previously in Erase Suspend)  
when a bank is in the autoselect mode, or if DQ5 goes high  
(while the bank is providing status information) or performing  
sector lock/unlock.  
11. Total number of cycles in the command sequence is determined  
by the number of words written to the write buffer. The number  
of cycles in the command sequence is 37 for full page  
programming (32 words). Less than 32 word programming is not  
recommended.  
12. Command sequence resets device for next command after write-  
to-buffer operation.  
13. System may read and program in non-erasing sectors, or enter  
the autoselect mode, when in the Erase Suspend mode. The  
Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector erase  
operation, and requires the bank address.  
14. Erase Resume command is valid only during the Erase Suspend  
mode, and requires the bank address.  
15. Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or  
when device is in autoselect mode. Address will equal 55h on all  
future devices, but 555h for WS256N/128N/064N.  
16. Requires Entry command sequence prior to execution. Unlock  
Bypass Reset command is required to return to reading array  
data.  
17. Requires Entry command sequence prior to execution. SecSi  
Sector Exit Reset command is required to exit this mode; device  
may otherwise be placed in an unknown state.  
8. The system must provide the bank address. See Autoselect  
section for more information.  
9. Data in cycle 5 is 2230 (WS256N), 2232 (WS064N), or 2231  
(WS128N).  
10. See Table 5.16 for indicator bit values.  
18. Requires reset command to configure the Configuration Register.  
89  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 10.2. Sector Protection Commands  
Bus Cycles (Notes 1–4)  
First  
Second  
Third  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh  
Command Sequence  
(Notes)  
Addr  
Data  
AA  
Addr  
Data  
55  
Addr  
Data  
Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data  
Command Set Entry (5)  
3
2
1
2
3
2
4
7
2
3
2
2
1
2
3
2
1
555  
XX  
2AA  
77  
555  
40  
Lock  
Register  
Bits  
Program (6)  
A0  
data  
Read (6)  
77  
data  
90  
Command Set Exit (7)  
Command Set Entry (5)  
Program [0-3] (8)  
Read (9)  
XX  
XX  
2AA  
00  
00  
55  
555  
XX  
AA  
555  
60  
A0  
PWD[0-3]  
PWD1  
03  
Password  
Protection  
0...00 PWD0 0...01  
0...02  
00  
PWD2 0...03 PWD3  
Unlock  
00  
XX  
555  
XX  
XX  
SA  
25  
90  
00  
XX  
PWD0  
01  
PWD1  
02  
PWD2  
03  
PWD3  
00  
29  
Command Set Exit (7)  
Command Set Entry (5)  
PPB Program (10)  
All PPB Erase (10, 11)  
PPB Status Read  
00  
AA  
2AA  
SA  
55  
[BA]555  
C0  
A0  
00  
Non-Volatile  
Sector  
Protection (PPB)  
80  
00  
30  
RD(0)  
90  
Command Set Exit (7)  
Command Set Entry (5)  
PPB Lock Bit Set  
XX  
555  
XX  
BA  
XX  
2AA  
XX  
00  
55  
00  
Global  
Volatile Sector  
Protection  
Freeze  
AA  
[BA]555  
[BA]555  
50  
E0  
A0  
PPB Lock Bit Status Read  
RD(0)  
Command Set Exit (7)  
Command Set Entry (5)  
DYB Set  
2
3
2
2
1
2
XX  
555  
XX  
XX  
SA  
90  
AA  
XX  
2AA  
SA  
00  
55  
00  
01  
(PPB Lock)  
A0  
Volatile Sector  
Protection  
(DYB)  
DYB Clear  
A0  
SA  
DYB Status Read  
Command Set Exit (7)  
RD(0)  
90  
XX  
XX  
00  
Legend:  
X = Don’t care.  
RA = Address of the memory location to be read.  
PD(0) = SecSi Sector Lock Bit. PD(0), or bit[0].  
PD(1) = Persistent Protection Mode Lock Bit. PD(1), or bit[1], must  
be set to ‘0’ for protection while PD(2), bit[2] must be left as ‘1’.  
PD(2) = Password Protection Mode Lock Bit. PD(2), or bit[2], must  
be set to ‘0’ for protection while PD(1), bit[1] must be left as ‘1’.  
BA = Bank Address. WS256N = A23–A20; WS128N = A22–A20;  
WS064N = A21–A18.  
PWD3–PWD0 = Password Data. PD3–PD0 present four 16 bit  
combinations that represent the 64-bit Password  
PWA = Password Address. Address bits A1 and A0 are used to select  
each 16-bit portion of the 64-bit entity.  
PWD = Password Data.  
RD(0), RD(1), RD(2) = DQ0, DQ1, or DQ2 protection indicator bit. If  
protected, DQ0, DQ1, or DQ2 = 0. If unprotected, DQ0, DQ1,  
DQ2 = 1.  
PD(3) = Protection Mode OTP Bit. PD(3) or bit[3].  
SA = Sector Address. WS256N = A23–A14; WS128N = A22–A14;  
WS064N = A21–A14.  
Notes:  
1. All values are in hexadecimal.  
6. If both the Persistent Protection Mode Locking Bit and the  
Password Protection Mode Locking Bit are set at the same time,  
the command operation will abort and return the device to the  
default Persistent Sector Protection Mode during 2nd bus cycle.  
Note that on all future devices, addresses will equal 00h, but are  
currently 77h for WS256N, WS128N, and WS064N. See Tables  
6.1 and 6.2 for explanation of lock bits.  
2. Shaded cells indicate read cycles.  
3. Address and data bits not specified in table, legend, or notes are  
don’t cares (each hex digit implies 4 bits of data).  
4. Writing incorrect address and data values or writing them in the  
improper sequence may place the device in an unknown state.  
The system must write the reset command to return the device  
to reading array data.  
5. Entry commands are required to enter a specific mode to enable  
instructions only available within that mode.  
7. Exit command must be issued to reset the device into read  
mode; device may otherwise be placed in an unknown state.  
8. Entire two bus-cycle sequence must be entered for each portion  
of the password.  
9. Full address range is required for reading password.  
10. See Figure 6.2 for details.  
11. “All PPB Erase” command will pre-program all PPBs before  
erasure to prevent over-erasure.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
90  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
10.1 Common Flash Memory Interface  
The Common Flash Interface (CFI) specification outlines device and host system software in-  
terrogation handshake, which allows specific vendor-specified soft-ware algorithms to be  
used for entire families of devices. Software support can then be device-independent, JEDEC  
ID-independent, and forward- and back-ward-compatible for the specified flash device fami-  
lies. Flash vendors can standardize their existing interfaces for long-term compatibility.  
This device enters the CFI Query mode when the system writes the CFI Query command, 98h,  
to address (BA)555h any time the device is ready to read array data. The system can read  
CFI information at the addresses given in Tables 10.3–10.6) within that bank. All reads out-  
side of the CFI address range, within the bank, will return non-valid data. Reads from other  
banks are allowed, writes are not. To terminate reading CFI data, the system must write the  
reset command.  
The following is a C source code example of using the CFI Entry and Exit functions. Refer to  
the Spansion Low Level Driver User’s Guide (available on www.amd.com and  
www.fujitsu.com) for general information on Spansion Flash memory software development  
guidelines.  
/* Example: CFI Entry command */  
*( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x555 ) = 0x0098;  
/* write CFI entry command  
/* write cfi exit command  
*/  
*/  
/* Example: CFI Exit command */  
*( (UINT16 *)bank_addr + 0x000 ) = 0x00F0;  
For further information, please refer to the CFI Specification (see JEDEC publications JEP137-  
A and JESD68.01and CFI Publication 100). Please contact your sales office for copies of these  
documents.  
Table 10.3. CFI Query Identification String  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
10h  
11h  
12h  
0051h  
0052h  
0059h  
Query Unique ASCII string “QRY”  
13h  
14h  
0002h  
0000h  
Primary OEM Command Set  
15h  
16h  
0040h  
0000h  
Address for Primary Extended Table  
17h  
18h  
0000h  
0000h  
Alternate OEM Command Set (00h = none exists)  
Address for Alternate OEM Extended Table (00h = none exists)  
19h  
1Ah  
0000h  
0000h  
91  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 10.4. System Interface String  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
V
Min. (write/erase)  
CC  
1Bh  
0017h  
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt  
V
Max. (write/erase)  
CC  
1Ch  
0019h  
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
0000h  
0000h  
0006h  
0009h  
000Ah  
0000h  
0004h  
0004h  
0003h  
0000h  
V
V
Min. voltage (00h = no V pin present)  
PP  
PP  
Max. voltage (00h = no V pin present)  
PP  
PP  
Typical timeout per single byte/word write 2N µs  
Typical timeout for Min. size buffer write 2N µs (00h = not supported)  
Typical timeout per individual block erase 2N ms  
Typical timeout for full chip erase 2N ms (00h = not supported)  
Max. timeout for byte/word write 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for buffer write 2N times typical  
Max. timeout per individual block erase 2N times typical  
Max. timeout for full chip erase 2N times typical (00h = not supported)  
Table 10.5. Device Geometry Definition  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
0019h (WS256N)  
0018h (WS128N)  
0017h (WS064N)  
27h  
Device Size = 2N byte  
28h  
29h  
0001h  
0000h  
Flash Device Interface description (refer to CFI publication 100)  
Max. number of bytes in multi-byte write = 2N  
(00h = not supported)  
2Ah  
2Bh  
0006h  
0000h  
2Ch  
0003h  
Number of Erase Block Regions within device  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
0003h  
0000h  
0080h  
0000h  
Erase Block Region 1 Information  
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)  
00FDh (WS256N)  
007Dh (WS128N)  
003Dh (WS064N)  
31h  
Erase Block Region 2 Information  
32h  
33h  
34h  
0000h  
0000h  
0002h  
35h  
36h  
37h  
38h  
0003h  
0000h  
0080h  
0000h  
Erase Block Region 3 Information  
Erase Block Region 4 Information  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
0000h  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
92  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 10.6. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
40h  
41h  
42h  
0050h  
0052h  
0049h  
Query-unique ASCII string “PRI”  
43h  
44h  
0031h  
0034h  
Major version number, ASCII  
Minor version number, ASCII  
Address Sensitive Unlock (Bits 1-0)  
0 = Required, 1 = Not Required  
45h  
0100h  
Silicon Technology (Bits 5-2) 0100 = 0.11 µm  
Erase Suspend  
0 = Not Supported, 1 = To Read Only, 2 = To Read & Write  
46h  
47h  
48h  
49h  
0002h  
0001h  
0000h  
0008h  
Sector Protect  
0 = Not Supported, X = Number of sectors in per group  
Sector Temporary Unprotect  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported  
Sector Protect/Unprotect scheme  
08 = Advanced Sector Protection  
00F3h (WS256N)  
006Fh (WS128N)  
0037h (WS064N)  
Simultaneous Operation  
Number of Sectors in all banks except boot bank  
4Ah  
4Bh  
Burst Mode Type  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported  
0001h  
0000h  
Page Mode Type  
4Ch  
00 = Not Supported, 01 = 4 Word Page, 02 = 8 Word Page, 04 = 16 Word  
Page  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Minimum  
4Dh  
4Eh  
0085h  
0095h  
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV  
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Maximum  
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV  
Top/Bottom Boot Sector Flag  
0001h = Dual Boot Device  
4Fh  
50h  
51h  
52h  
53h  
0001h  
0001h  
0001h  
0007h  
0014h  
Program Suspend. 00h = not supported  
Unlock Bypass  
00 = Not Supported, 01=Supported  
SecSi Sector (Customer OTP Area) Size 2N bytes  
Hardware Reset Low Time-out during an embedded algorithm to read  
mode Maximum 2N ns  
Hardware Reset Low Time-out not during an embedded algorithm to read  
mode Maximum 2N ns  
54h  
0014h  
55h  
56h  
57h  
0005h  
0005h  
0010h  
Erase Suspend Time-out Maximum 2N ns  
Program Suspend Time-out Maximum 2N ns  
Bank Organization: X = Number of banks  
0013h (WS256N)  
000Bh (WS128N)  
0007h (WS064N)  
58h  
Bank 0 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
93  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 10.6. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query (Continued)  
Addresses  
Data  
Description  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
59h  
Bank 1 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
5Ah  
5Bh  
5Ch  
5Dh  
5Eh  
5Fh  
60h  
61h  
62h  
63h  
64h  
65h  
66h  
67h  
Bank 2 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 3 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 4 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 5 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 6 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 7 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 8 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 9 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 10 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 11 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 12 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 13 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 14 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
Bank 15 Region Information. X = Number of sectors in bank  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0010h (WS256N)  
0008h (WS128N)  
0004h (WS064N)  
0013h (WS256N)  
000Bh (WS128N)  
0007h (WS064N)  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
94  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
11 Commonly Used Terms  
Term  
Definition  
ACCelerate. A special purpose input signal which allows for faster programming or  
erase operation when raised to a specified voltage above VCC. In some devices ACC  
may protect all sectors when at a low voltage.  
ACC  
Most significant bit of the address input [A23 for 256Mbit, A22 for128Mbit, A21 for  
64Mbit]  
Amax  
Amin  
Least significant bit of the address input signals (A0 for all devices in this document).  
Operation where signal relationships are based only on propagation delays and are  
unrelated to synchronous control (clock) signal.  
Asynchronous  
Read mode for obtaining manufacturer and device information as well as sector  
protection status.  
Autoselect  
Bank  
Section of the memory array consisting of multiple consecutive sectors. A read  
operation in one bank, can be independent of a program or erase operation in a  
different bank for devices that offer simultaneous read and write feature.  
Smaller size sectors located at the top and or bottom of Flash device address space.  
The smaller sector size allows for finer granularity control of erase and protection for  
code or parameters used to initiate system operation after power-on or reset.  
Boot sector  
Boundary  
Burst Read  
Byte  
Location at the beginning or end of series of memory locations.  
See synchronous read.  
8 bits  
Common Flash Interface. A Flash memory industry standard specification [JEDEC 137-  
A and JESD68.01] designed to allow a system to interrogate the Flash to determine its  
size, type and other performance parameters.  
CFI  
Clear  
Zero (Logic Low Level)  
Special purpose register which must be programmed to enable synchronous read  
mode  
Configuration Register  
Synchronous method of burst read whereby the device will read continuously until it is  
stopped by the host, or it has reached the highest address of the memory array, after  
which the read address wraps around to the lowest memory array address  
Continuous Read  
Erase  
Returns bits of a Flash memory array to their default state of a logical One (High Level).  
Halts an erase operation to allow reading or programming in any sector that is not  
selected for erasure  
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume  
Ball Grid Array package. Spansion LLC offers two variations: Fortified Ball Grid Array  
and Fine-pitch Ball Grid Array. See the specific package drawing or connection diagram  
for further details.  
BGA  
Synchronous (burst) read operation in which 8, 16, or 32 words of sequential data with  
Linear Read  
or without wraparound before requiring a new initial address  
.
Multi-Chip Package. A method of combining integrated circuits in a single package by  
“stacking” multiple die of the same or different devices.  
MCP  
Memory Array  
MirrorBit™ Technology  
The programmable area of the product available for data storage.  
Spansion™ trademarked technology for storing multiple bits of data in the same  
transistor.  
95  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Term  
Definition  
Group of words that may be accessed more rapidly as a group than if the words were  
accessed individually.  
Page  
Asynchronous read operation of several words in which the first word of the group  
takes a longer initial access time and subsequent words in the group take less “page”  
access time to be read. Different words in the group are accessed by changing only the  
least significant address lines.  
Page Read  
Sector protection method which uses a programmable password, in addition to the  
Password Protection  
Persistent Protection  
Program  
Persistent Protection method, for protection of sectors in the Flash memory device  
.
Sector protection method that uses commands and only the standard core voltage  
supply to control protection of sectors in the Flash memory device. This method  
replaces a prior technique of requiring a 12V supply to control the protection method.  
Stores data into a Flash memory by selectively clearing bits of the memory array in  
order to leave a data pattern of “ones” and “zeros”.  
Program Suspend/Program  
Resume  
Halts a programming operation to read data from any location that is not selected for  
programming or erase.  
Read  
Host bus cycle that causes the Flash to output data onto the data bus.  
Dynamic storage bits for holding device control information or tracking the status of  
an operation.  
Registers  
Secured Silicon. An area consisting of 256 bytes in which any word may be  
programmed once, and the entire area may be protected once from any future  
programming. Information in this area may be programmed at the factory or by the  
user. Once programmed and protected there is no way to change the secured  
information. This area is often used to store a software readable identification such as  
a serial number.  
SecSi™  
Use of one or more control bits per sector to indicate whether each sector may be  
programmed or erased. If the Protection bit for a sector is set the embedded  
algorithms for program or erase will ignore program or erase commands related to that  
sector.  
Sector Protection  
Sector  
An Area of the memory array in which all bits must be erased together by an erase  
operation.  
Mode of operation in which a host system may issue a program or erase command to  
one bank, that embedded algorithm operation may then proceed while the host  
immediately follows the embedded algorithm command with reading from another  
bank. Reading may continue concurrently in any bank other than the one executing  
the embedded algorithm operation.  
Simultaneous Operation  
Synchronous Operation  
Operation that progresses only when a timing signal, known as a clock, transitions  
between logic levels (that is, at a clock edge).  
Separate power supply or voltage reference signal that allows the host system to set  
the voltage levels that the device generates at its data outputs and the voltages  
tolerated at its data inputs.  
VersatileIO™ (VIO  
Unlock Bypass  
Word  
)
Mode that facilitates faster program times by reducing the number of command bus  
cycles required to issue a write operation command. In this mode the initial two  
“Unlock” write cycles, of the usual 4 cycle Program command, are not required –  
reducing all Program commands to two bus cycles while in this mode.  
Two contiguous bytes (16 bits) located at an even byte boundary. A double word is two  
contiguous words located on a two word boundary. A quad word is four contiguous  
words located on a four word boundary.  
November 4, 2004 S29WSxxxN_M0_F0  
96  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Term  
Definition  
Special burst read mode where the read address “wraps” or returns back to the lowest  
address boundary in the selected range of words, after reading the last Byte or Word  
in the range, e.g. for a 4 word range of 0 to 3, a read beginning at word 2 would read  
words in the sequence 2, 3, 0, 1.  
Wraparound  
Interchangeable term for a program/erase operation where the content of a register  
and or memory location is being altered. The term write is often associated with  
“writing command cycles” to enter or exit a particular mode of operation.  
Write  
Multi-word area in which multiple words may be programmed as a single operation. A  
Write Buffer  
Write Buffer may be 16 to 32 words long and is located on a 16 or 32 word boundary  
respectively.  
Method of writing multiple words, up to the maximum size of the Write Buffer, in one  
Write Buffer Programming  
Write Operation Status  
operation. Using Write Buffer Programming will result in  
time than by using single word at a time programming commands.  
8 times faster programming  
Allows the host system to determine the status of a program or erase operation by  
reading several special purpose register bits  
.
97  
S29WSxxxN_M0_F0 November 4, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
pSRAM Type 4  
8M x 16-bit Synchronous Burst pSRAM  
Features  
„ Process Technology: CMOS  
„ Organization: 8M x16 bit  
„ Power Supply Voltage: 1.7~2.0V  
„ Three State Outputs  
„ Supports MRS (Mode Register Set)  
„ MRS control - MRS Pin Control  
„ Supports Power Saving modes - Partial Array Refresh mode Internal TCSR  
„ Supports Driver Strength Optimization for system environment power saving  
„ Supports Asynchronous 4-Page Read and Asynchronous Write Operation  
„ Supports Synchronous Burst Read and Asynchronous Write Operation (Ad-  
dress Latch Type and Low ADV Type)  
„ Supports Synchronous Burst Read and Synchronous Burst Write Operation  
„ Synchronous Burst (Read/Write) Operation  
— Supports 4 word / 8 word / 16 word and Full Page(256 word) burst  
— Supports Linear Burst type & Interleave Burst type  
— Latency support:  
Latency 5 @ 66MHz(tCD 10ns)  
Latency 4 @ 54MHz(tCD 10ns)  
— Supports Burst Read Suspend in No Clock toggling  
— Supports Burst Write Data Masking by /UB & /LB pin control  
— Supports WAIT pin function for indicating data availability.  
„ Max. Burst Clock Frequency: 66MHz  
Pin Description  
Pin Name  
CLK  
Function  
Type  
Description  
Clock  
Commands are referenced to CLK  
ADV#  
MRS#  
Address Valid  
Valid Address is latched by ADV falling edge  
MRS# low enables Mode Register to be set  
CS# low enables the chip to be active  
Mode Register set  
CS#  
Chip Select  
CS# high disables the chip and puts it into standby  
mode  
Input  
OE#  
WE#  
LB#  
Output Enable  
Write Enable  
OE# low enables the chip to output the data  
WE# low enables the chip to start writing the data  
Lower Byte (I/O0~7  
)
UB# (LB#) low enables upper byte (lower byte) to  
start operating  
UB#  
Upper Byte (I/O8~15)  
Valid addresses input when ADV is low  
Mode setting input when MRS is low  
A0-A22  
Address 0 ~ Address 22  
Depending on UB# or LB# status, word (16-bit,  
UB# & LB# low) data, upper byte (8-bit, UB# low &  
LB# high) data or lower byte (8-bit, LB# low & UB#  
high) data is loaded  
I/O0-I/O15  
Data Inputs / Outputs  
Input/Output  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
98  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Pin Name  
VCC  
Function  
Voltage Source  
Type  
Description  
Power  
Power  
GND  
Core Power supply  
I/O Power supply  
Core ground Source  
I/O Ground Source  
VCCQ  
Voltage Source  
VSS  
Ground Source  
VSSQ  
I/O Ground Source  
Valid Data Indicator  
GND  
WAIT#  
Output  
WAIT# indicates whether data is valid or not  
Power Up Sequence  
After applying V up to minimum operating voltage (1.7V), drive CS# high first  
CC  
and then drive MRS# high. This gets the device into power up mode. Wait 200 µs  
minimum to get into the normal operation mode. During power up mode, the  
standby current cannot be guaranteed. To obtain stable standby current levels,  
at least one cycle of active operation should be implemented regardless of wait  
time duration. To obtain appropriate device operation, be sure to follow the  
proper power up sequence.  
1. Apply power.  
2. Maintain stable power (V min.=1.7V) for a minimum 200 µs with CS# and  
CC  
MRS# high.  
99  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Timing Diagrams  
Power Up  
200 µs  
VCC(Min)  
VCC  
Min. 0ns  
Min. 0ns  
MRS#  
CS#  
Min. 200 µs  
PowerUp Mode  
Normal Operation  
Figure 11.24. Power Up Timing  
Notes:  
1. After VCC reaches VCC(Min.), wait 200 µs with CS# and MRS# high. This puts the device into normal operation.  
Standby Mode  
CS# = V  
CS# = UB# = LB# = V  
WE# = V , MRS# = V  
CS# = V , UB# or LB# = V  
IL IL  
IH  
IL  
IH  
MRS# = V  
MRS# = V  
CS# = V  
IH  
IH  
IL  
IH  
MRS# = V  
IH  
Initial State  
(wait 200µs)  
Standby  
Mode  
PAR  
Mode  
Power On  
MRS Setting  
Active  
MRS# = V  
IL  
MRS Setting  
CS# = V  
IL  
WE# = V , MRS#=V  
IL IL  
Figure 11.25. Standby Mode State Machines  
The default mode after power up is Asynchronous mode (4 Page Read and Asyn-  
chronous Write). But this default mode is not 100% guaranteed, so the MRS#  
setting sequence is highly recommended after power up.  
For entry to PAR mode, drive the MRS# pin into V for over 0.5µs or longer (sus-  
IL  
pend period) during standby mode after the MRS# setting has been completed  
(A4=1, A3=0). If the MRS# pin is driven into V during PAR mode, the device  
IH  
reverts to standby mode without the wake up sequence.  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
100  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Functional Description  
Table 11.7. Asynchronous 4 Page Read & Asynchronous Write Mode (A15/A14=0/0)  
Mode  
CS#  
MRS#  
OE#  
X
WE#  
LB#  
X
UB#  
X
I/O  
I/O  
Power  
Standby  
PAR  
0-7  
8-15  
Deselected  
Deselected  
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
X
X
H
X
H
H
H
L
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
X
X
X
Output Disabled  
Outputs Disabled  
Lower Byte Read  
Upper Byte Read  
Word Read  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
H
X
X
X
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
H
L
H
H
L
L
D
OUT  
L
H
L
High-Z  
D
D
OUT  
OUT  
L
L
D
OUT  
Lower Byte Write  
Upper Byte Write  
Word Write  
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
D
High-Z  
IN  
L
H
L
High-Z  
D
D
IN  
IN  
L
L
D
IN  
Mode Register Set  
L
L
L
High-Z  
High-Z  
Legend:X = Don’t care (must be low or high state).  
Notes:  
1. In asynchronous mode, Clock and ADV# are ignored.  
2. The WAIT# pin is High-Z in asynchronous mode.  
101  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 11.8. Synchronous Burst Read & Asynchronous Write Mode (A15/A14=0/1)  
Mode  
CS# MRS# OE# WE# LB# UB#  
I/O  
I/O  
CLK  
ADV#  
Power  
0-7  
8-15  
X
X
Deselected  
H
H
L
H
L
X
X
H
X
X
X
H
X
X
X
X
H
X
X
X
H
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Standby  
(note 2)  
(note 2)  
X
X
Deselected  
PAR  
(note 2)  
(note 2)  
X
Output Disabled  
Outputs Disabled  
H
H
H
H
Active  
Active  
(note 2)  
X
L
(note 2)  
Read Command  
Lower Byte Read  
Upper Byte Read  
Word Read  
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
X
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
X
L
X
H
L
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
D
H
H
H
OUT  
H
L
High-Z  
D
D
OUT  
L
D
OUT  
OUT  
X
Lower Byte Write  
Upper Byte Write  
Word Write  
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
L
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
H
L
L
L
D
High-Z  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
IN  
(note 2)  
or  
or  
or  
or  
X
High-Z  
D
D
IN  
IN  
(note 2)  
X
D
IN  
(note 2)  
X
Mode Register Set  
L
High-Z  
High-Z  
(note 2)  
Notes:  
1. X must be low or high state.  
2. X means “Don’t care” (can be low, high or toggling).  
3. WAIT# is the device output signal and does not have any affect on the mode definition. Please refer to each timing diagram  
for WAIT# pin function.  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
102  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 11.9. Synchronous Burst Read & Synchronous Burst Write Mode(A15/A14=1/0)  
Mode  
CS# MRS#  
OE#  
WE#  
LB#  
UB#  
I/O  
I/O  
CLK  
ADV#  
Power  
0-7  
8-15  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Deselected  
H
H
L
H
L
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Standby  
(note1)  
(note1)  
(note1) (note1)  
(note 2)  
(note 2)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Deselected  
PAR  
(note1)  
(note1)  
(note1) (note1)  
(note 2)  
(note 2)  
Output  
Disabled  
X
H
H
H
H
X
H
X
H
H
H
Active  
Active  
(note 2)  
Outputs  
Disabled  
X
X
X
L
(note1)  
(note1)  
(note 2)  
Read  
Command  
X
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
X
L
X
H
L
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Active  
Active  
Active  
Active  
(note1)  
LowerByte  
Read  
L
L
L
D
H
H
H
OUT  
UpperByte  
Read  
H
L
High-Z  
D
D
OUT  
OUT  
Word Read  
L
D
OUT  
Write  
X
L
L
L
H
H
H
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Active  
Active  
Active  
L
Command  
(note1)  
or  
LowerByte  
Write  
X
H
H
L
H
L
D
H
H
IN  
(note1)  
UpperByte  
Write  
X
H
High-Z  
D
D
IN  
IN  
(note1)  
X
Word Write  
L
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
D
H
Active  
Active  
IN  
(note1)  
Mode  
Register  
Set  
High-Z  
High-Z  
L
or  
Notes:  
1. X must be low or high state.  
2. X means “Don’t care” (can be low, high or toggling).  
3. WAIT# is the device output signal and does not have any affect on the mode definition. Please refer to each timing diagram  
for WAIT# pin function.  
Mode Register Setting Operation  
The device has several modes:  
„ Asynchronous Page Read mode  
„ Asynchronous Write mode  
„ Synchronous Burst Read mode  
„ Synchronous Burst Write mode  
„ Standby mode and Partial Array Refresh (PAR) mode.  
Partial Array Refresh (PAR) mode is defined through the Mode Register Set (MRS)  
option. The MRS option also defines burst length, burst type, wait polarity and  
latency count at synchronous burst read/write mode.  
103  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Mode Register Set (MRS)  
The mode register stores the data for controlling the various operation modes of  
the pSRAM. It programs Partial Array Refresh (PAR), burst length, burst type, la-  
tency count and various vendor specific options to make pSRAM useful for a  
variety of different applications. The default values of mode register are defined,  
therefore when the reserved address is input, the device runs at default modes.  
The mode register is written by driving CS#, ADV#, WE#, UB#, LB# and MRS#  
to V and driving OE# to V during valid addressing. The mode register is di-  
IL  
IH  
vided into various fields depending on the fields of functions. The PAR field uses  
A0~A4, Burst Length field uses A5~A7, Burst Type uses A8, Latency Count uses  
A9~A11, Wait Polarity uses A13, Operation Mode uses A14~A15 and Driver  
Strength uses A16~A17.  
Refer to the Table below for detailed Mode Register Settings. A18~A22 addresses  
are “Don’t care” in the Mode Register Setting.  
Table 11.10. Mode Register Setting According to Field of Function  
Address  
Function  
A17-A16  
A15-A14  
A13  
A12  
A11-A19  
A8  
A7-A5  
A4-A3  
A2  
A1-A0  
DS  
MS  
WP  
RFU  
Latency  
BT  
BL  
PAR  
PARA  
PARS  
Note: DS (Driver Strength), MS (Mode Select), WP (Wait Polarity), Latency (Latency Count), BT (Burst Type), BL (Burst  
Length), PAR (Partial Array Refresh), PARA (Partial Array Refresh Array), PARS (Partial Array Refresh Size), RFU (Re-  
served for Future Use).  
Table 11.11. Mode Register Set  
Driver Strength  
A16 DS  
Mode Select  
MS  
A17  
0
A15  
0
A14  
0
0
1
0
Full Drive (note 1)  
1/2 Drive  
Async. 4 Page Read / Async. Write (note 1)  
Sync. Burst Read / Async. Write  
0
0
1
1
1/4 Drive  
1
0
Sync. Burst Read / Sync. Burst Write  
WAIT# Polarity  
RFU  
RFU  
Latency Count  
Burst Type  
BT  
Burst Length  
A6 A5  
A13  
WP  
A12  
0
A11 A10 A9  
Latency  
A8  
0
A7  
BL  
Low Enable  
(note 1)  
Must  
(note 1)  
Linear  
(note 1)  
0
1
0
0
0
3
0
1
0
4 word  
High Enable  
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
4
5
6
1
Interleave  
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
8 word  
16 word (note 1)  
Full (256 word)  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
104  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Partial Array Refresh  
PAR Array  
PARA  
PAR Size  
A4  
A3  
PAR  
A2  
A1  
A0  
PARS  
Bottom Array  
(note 1)  
Full Array  
(note 1)  
1
0
PAR Enable  
0
0
0
PAR Disable  
(note 1)  
1
1
1
Top Array  
0
1
3/4 Array  
1
1
0
1
1/2 Array  
1/4 Array  
Notes:  
1. Default mode. The address bits other than those listed in the table above are reserved. For example, Burst Length address  
bits(A7:A6:A5) have 4 sets of reserved bits like 0:0:0, 0:0:1, 1:0:1 and 1:1:0. If the reserved address bits are input, then  
the mode will be set to the default mode. Each field has its own default mode, but this default mode is not 100% guaranteed,  
so the MRS setting sequence is highly recommended after power up. A12 is a reserved bit for future use. A12 must be set as  
“0”. Not all the mode settings are tested. Per the mode settings to be tested, please contact Spansion. The 256 word Full  
page burst mode needs to meet tBC(Burst Cycle time) parameter as max. 2500ns.  
MRS Pin Control Type Mode Register Setting Timing  
In this device, the MRS pin is used for two purposes. One is to get into the mode  
register setting and the other is to execute Partial Array Refresh mode.  
To get into the Mode Register Setting, the system must drive the MRS# pin to V  
IL  
and immediately (within 0.5µs) issue a write command (drive CS#, ADV#, UB#,  
LB# and WE# to V and drive OE# to V during valid address). If the subse-  
IL  
IH  
quent write command (WE# signal input) is not issued within 0.5µs, then the  
device may get into the PAR mode.  
105  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
CLK  
ADV#  
tWC  
Address  
CS#  
tCW  
tAW  
tBW  
UB#, LB#  
WE#  
tWP  
tAS  
tWU  
tMW  
MRS#  
Register Update Complete  
Register Write Complete  
Register Write Start  
(MRS SETTING TIMING)  
1. Clock input is ignored.  
Figure 11.26. Mode Register Setting Timing (OE# = VIH  
)
Table 11.12. MRS AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Parameter List  
Symbol  
tMW  
Min  
0
Max  
500  
Units  
ns  
MRS# Enable to Register Write Start  
End of Write to MRS# Disable  
MRS  
tWU  
0
ns  
Note: VCC=1.7~2.0V, TA=-40 to 85°C, Maximum Main Clock Frequency=66MHz  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
106  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Asynchronous Operation  
Asynchronous 4 Page Read Operation  
Asynchronous normal read operation starts when CS#, OE# and UB# or LB# are  
driven to V under the valid address without toggling page addresses (A0, A1).  
IL  
If the page addresses (A0, A1) are toggled under the other valid address, the first  
data will be out with the normal read cycle time (tRC) and the second, the third  
and the fourth data will be out with the page cycle time (tPC). (MRS# and WE#  
should be driven to V during the asynchronous (page) read operation) Clock,  
IH  
ADV#, WAIT# signals are ignored during the asynchronous (page) read  
operation.  
Asynchronous Write Operation  
Asynchronous write operation starts when CS#, WE# and UB# or LB# are driven  
to V under the valid address. MRS# and OE# should be driven to V during the  
IL  
IH  
asynchronous write operation. Clock, ADV#, WAIT# signals are ignored during  
the asynchronous (page) read operation.  
Asynchronous Write Operation in Synchronous Mode  
A write operation starts when CS#, WE# and UB# or LB# are driven to V under  
IL  
the valid address. Clock input does not have any affect to the write operation  
(MRS# and OE# should be driven to V during write operation. ADV# can be ei-  
IH  
ther toggling for address latch or held in V ). Clock, ADV#, WAIT# signals are  
IL  
ignored during the asynchronous (page) read operation.  
A22~A2  
A1~A0  
CS#  
UB#, LB#  
OE#  
Data Out  
Figure 11.27. Asynchronous 4-Page Read  
Address  
CS#  
UB#, LB#  
WE#  
High-Z  
Data in  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Data out  
Figure 11.28. Asynchronous Write  
107  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Synchronous Burst Operation  
Burst mode operations enable the system to get high performance read and write  
operation. The address to be accessed is latched on the rising edge of clock or  
ADV# (whichever occurs first). CS# should be setup before the address latch.  
During this first clock rising edge, WE# indicates whether the operation is going  
to be a Read (WE# High) or a Write (WE# Low).  
For the optimized Burst Mode of each system, the system should determine how  
many clock cycles are required for the first data of each burst access (Latency  
Count), how many words the device outputs during an access (Burst Length) and  
which type of burst operation (Burst Type: Linear or Interleave) is needed. The  
Wait Polarity should also be determined (See Table 11.11).  
Synchronous Burst Read Operation  
The Synchronous Burst Read command is implemented when the clock rising is  
detected during the ADV# low pulse. ADV# and CS# should be set up before the  
clock rising. During the Read command, WE# should be held in V . The multiple  
IH  
clock risings (during the low ADV# period) are allowed, but the burst operation  
starts from the first clock rising. The first data will be out with Latency count and  
t
.
CD  
Synchronous Burst Write Operation  
The Synchronous Burst Write command is implemented when the clock rising is  
detected during the ADV# and WE# low pulse. ADV#, WE# and CS# should be  
set up before the clock rising. The multiple clock risings (during the low ADV#  
period) are allowed but, the burst operation starts from the first clock rising. The  
first data will be written in the Latency clock with t  
.
DS  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14  
CLK  
ADV#  
Addr.  
CS#  
UB#, LB#  
OE#  
Data Out  
WAIT#  
Figure 11.29. Synchronous Burst Read  
Note: Latency 5, BL 4, WP: Low Enable  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
108  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13  
CLK  
ADV#  
Addr.  
CS#  
UB#, LB#  
WE#  
Data in  
WAIT#  
Figure 11.30. Synchronous Burst Write  
Note: Latency 5, BL 4, WP: Low Enable  
Synchronous Burst Operation Terminology  
Clock (CLK)  
The clock input is used as the reference for synchronous burst read and write op-  
eration of the pSRAM. The synchronous burst read and write operations are  
synchronized to the rising edge of the clock. The clock transitions must swing be-  
tween V and V .  
IL  
IH  
Latency Count  
The Latency Count configuration tells the device how many clocks must elapse  
from the burst command before the first data should be available on its data pins.  
This value depends on the input clock frequency. Table 11.13 shows the sup-  
ported Latency Count.  
Table 11.13. Latency Count Support  
Clock Frequency  
Latency Count  
Up to 66 MHz  
Up to 54 MHz  
Up to 40 MHz  
5
4
3
Table 11.14. Number of CLocks for 1st Data  
Set Latency  
Latency 3  
Latency 4  
Latency 5  
# of Clocks for 1st data (Read)  
# of Clocks for 1st data (Write)  
4
2
5
3
6
4
109  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
T
Clock  
ADV#  
Address  
Latency 3  
Latency 4  
Latency 5  
Latency 6  
DQ1  
DQ2  
DQ3  
DQ2  
DQ1  
DQ4  
DQ3  
DQ2  
DQ1  
DQ5  
DQ4  
DQ3  
DQ2  
DQ6  
DQ5  
DQ4  
DQ3  
DQ7  
DQ6  
DQ5  
DQ4  
DQ8  
DQ7  
DQ6  
DQ5  
DQ9  
DQ8  
DQ7  
DQ6  
Data out  
Data out  
Data out  
Data out  
DQ1  
Figure 11.31. Latency Configuration (Read)  
Note: The first data will always keep the Latency. From the second data on, some period of wait time may be caused  
by WAIT# pin.  
Burst Length  
Burst Length identifies how many data the device outputs during an access. The  
device supports 4 word, 8 word, 16 word and 256 word burst read or write. 256  
word Full page burst mode needs to meet t  
2500ns max.  
(Burst Cycle time) parameter as  
BC  
The first data will be output with the set Latency + t . From the second data on,  
CD  
the data will be output with t  
from each clock.  
CD  
Burst Stop  
Burst stop is used when the system wants to stop burst operation on purpose. If  
driving CS# to V during the burst read operation, the burst operation is  
IH  
stopped. During the burst read operation, the new burst operation cannot be is-  
sued. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst  
operation is finished.  
The burst stop feature is very useful because it enables the user to utilize the un-  
supported burst length such as 1 burst or 2 burst, used mostly in the mobile  
handset application environment.  
Synchronous Burst Operation Terminology  
Wait Control (WAIT#)  
The WAIT# signal is the device’s output signal that indicates to the host system  
when it’s data-out or data-in is valid.  
To be compatible with the Flash interfaces of various microprocessor types, the  
WAIT# polarity (WP) can be configured. The polarity can be programmed to be  
either low enable or high enable.  
For the timing of WAIT# signal, the WAIT# signal should be set active one clock  
prior to the data regardless of Read or Write cycle.  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
110  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
CLK  
ADV#  
CS#  
Latency 5  
Read  
Data out  
DQ0 DQ1  
DQ2  
DQ3  
High-Z  
High-Z  
WAIT#  
Latency 5  
Write  
Data in  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
WAIT#  
Figure 11.32. WAIT# and Read/Write Latency Control  
Note: LATENCY: 5, Burst Length: 4, WP: Low Enable  
Burst Type  
The device supports Linear type burst sequence and Interleave type burst se-  
quence. Linear type burst sequentially increments the burst address from the  
starting address. The detailed Linear and Interleave type burst address sequence  
is shown in Table 11.15.  
Table 11.15. Burst Sequence  
Burst Address Sequence (Decimal)  
Wrap (note 1)  
Start  
Address  
4 word Burst  
8 word Burst  
Linear  
16 word Burst  
Full Page(256 word)  
Linear  
Linear  
Interleave  
0-1-2-3  
1-0-3-2  
2-3-0-1  
3-2-1-0  
Interleave  
0-1-2-...-6-7  
1-0-3-...-7-6  
2-3-0-...-4-5  
3-2-1-...-5-4  
4-5-6-...-2-3  
5-4-7-...-3-2  
6-7-4-...-0-1  
7-6-5-...-1-0  
Linear  
Interleave  
0-1-2-3-4...14-15  
1-0-3-2-5...15-14  
2-3-0-1-6...12-13  
3-2-1-0-7...13-12  
4-5-6-7-0...10-11  
5-4-7-6-1...11-10  
6-7-4-5-2...8-9  
7-6-5-4-3...9-8  
~
0
1
0-1-2-3  
1-2-3-0  
2-3-0-1  
3-0-1-2  
0-1-...-5-6-7  
1-2-...-6-7-0  
2-3-...-7-0-1  
3-4-...-0-1-2  
4-5-...-1-2-3  
5-6-...-2-3-4  
6-7-...-3-4-5  
7-0-...-4-5-6  
0-1-2-...-14-15  
1-2-3-...-15-0  
2-3-4-...-0-1  
3-4-5-...-1-2  
4-5-6-...-2-3  
5-6-7-...-3-4  
6-7-8-...-4-5  
7-8-9-...-5-6  
~
0-1-2-...-254-255  
1-2-3-...-255-0  
2
2-3-4-...-255-0-1  
3-4-5-...-255-0-1-2  
4-5-6-...-255-0-1-2-3  
5-6-7-...-255-...-3-4  
6-7-8-...-255-...-4-5  
7-8-9-...-255-...-5-6  
~
3
4
5
6
7
~
14  
15  
~
14-15-0-...-12-13  
15-0-1-...-13-14  
14-15-12-...-0-1  
15-14-13-...-1-0  
14-15-...-255-...-12-13  
15-16-...-255-...-13-14  
~
255  
255-0-1-...-253-254  
111  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Low Power Features  
Internal TCSR  
The internal Temperature Compensated Self Refresh (TCSR) feature is a very  
useful tool for reducing standby current at room temperature (below 40°C).  
DRAM cells have weak refresh characteristics in higher temperatures. High tem-  
peratures require more refresh cycles, which can lead to standby current  
increase.  
Without the internal TCSR, the refresh cycle should be set at worst condition so  
as to cover the high temperature (85°C) refresh characteristics. But with internal  
TCSR, a refresh cycle below 40°C can be optimized, so the standby current at  
room temperature can be greatly reduced. This feature is beneficial since most  
mobile phones are used at or below 40°C in the phone standby mode.  
0.5 µs  
MRS#  
Normal  
Operation  
Normal  
Operation  
Suspend  
PAR mode  
MODE  
CS#  
Figure 11.33. PAR Mode Execution and Exit  
Table 11.16. PAR Mode Characteristics  
Address (Bottom Array) Address (Top Array)  
Memory Cell  
Standby Current  
(µA, Max)  
Wait  
Time (µs)  
Power Mode  
(note 2)  
(note 2)  
Data  
Standby (Full Array)  
Partial Refresh(3/4 Block)  
Partial Refresh(1/2 Block)  
Partial Refresh(1/4 Block)  
000000h ~ 7FFFFFh  
000000h ~ 5FFFFFh  
000000h ~ 3FFFFFh  
000000h ~ 1FFFFFh  
000000h ~ 7FFFFFh  
200000h ~ 7FFFFFh  
400000h ~ 7FFFFFh  
600000h ~ 7FFFFFh  
200  
170  
150  
140  
Valid (note 1)  
0
Notes:  
1. Only the data in the refreshed block are valid.  
2. The PAR Array can be selected through Mode Register Set (see “Mode Register Setting Operation” on page 103).  
Driver Strength Optimization  
The optimization of output driver strength is possible through the mode register  
setting to adjust for the different data loadings. Through this driver strength op-  
timization, the device can minimize the noise generated on the data bus during  
read operation. The device supports full drive, 1/2 drive and 1/4 drive.  
Partial Array Refresh (PAR) mode  
The PAR mode enables the user to specify the active memory array size. The  
pSRAM consists of 4 blocks and the user can select 1 block, 2 blocks, 3 blocks or  
all blocks as active memory arrays through the Mode Register Setting. The active  
memory array is periodically refreshed whereas the disabled array is not re-  
freshed, so the previously stored data is lost. Even though PAR mode is enabled  
through the Mode Register Setting, PAR mode execution by the MRS# pin is still  
needed. The normal operation can be executed even in refresh-disabled array as  
long as the MRS# pin is not driven to the Low condition for over 0.5µs. Driving  
the MRS# pin to the High condition puts the device back to the normal operation  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
112  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
mode from the PAR executed mode. Refer to Figure 11.33 and Table 11.16 for  
PAR operation and PAR address mapping.  
Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Item  
Symbol  
VIN , VOUT  
VCC  
Ratings  
-0.2 to VCC+0.3V  
-0.2 to 2.5V  
1.0  
Unit  
V
Voltage on any pin relative to VSS  
Power supply voltage relative to VSS  
Power Dissipation  
V
PD  
W
Storage temperature  
TSTG  
-65 to 150  
-40 to 85  
°C  
°C  
Operating Temperature  
TA  
Notes:  
1. Stresses greater than those listed under "Absolute Maximum Ratings" section may cause permanent damage to the device.  
Functional operation should be restricted to use under recommended operating conditions only. Exposure to absolute  
maximum rating conditions longer than one second may affect reliability.  
DC Recommended Operating Conditions  
Symbol  
VCC  
Parameter  
Power Supply Voltage  
Ground  
Min  
1.7  
Typ  
1.85  
0
Max  
Unit  
2.0  
VSS  
0
0
VCC + 0.2 (note 2)  
0.4  
V
VIH  
Input High Voltage  
Input Low Voltage  
0.8 x VCC  
-0.2 (note 3)  
VIL  
Notes:  
1. TA=-40 to 85°C, unless otherwise specified.  
2. Overshoot: VCC+1.0V in case of pulse width 20ns.  
3. Undershoot: -1.0V in case of pulse width 20ns.  
4. Overshoot and undershoot are sampled, not 100% tested.  
Capacitance (Ta = 25°C, f = 1 MHz)  
Symbol  
CIN  
Parameter  
Test Condition  
VIN = 0V  
Min  
Max  
8
Unit  
pF  
Input Capacitance  
CIO  
Input/Output Capacitance  
VOUT = 0V  
10  
pF  
Note: This parameter is sampled periodically and is not 100% tested.  
113  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
DC and Operating Characteristics  
Common  
Item  
Symbol  
Test Conditions  
Min  
-1  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
µA  
Input Leakage Current  
Output Leakage Current  
I
V
=V to V  
CC  
1
1
LI  
IN  
SS  
I
CS#=V , MRS#=V , OE#=V or WE#=V , V =V to V  
CC  
-1  
µA  
LO  
IH  
IH  
IH  
IL  
IO  
SS  
Average Operating  
Current  
Cycle time=t +3t , I =0mA, 100% duty, CS#=V , MRS#=V  
,
RC  
IH  
PC IO  
IL  
IH  
I
40  
mA  
CC2  
V
=V or V  
IN  
IL  
Output Low Voltage  
Output High Voltage  
V
I
I
=0.1mA  
1.4  
0.2  
V
V
OL  
OL  
V
=-0.1mA  
OH  
OH  
< 40°C  
< 85°C  
TBD  
200  
TBD  
TBD  
TBD  
170  
150  
140  
µA  
µA  
CS# V -0.2V, MRS# V -0.2V, Other  
inputs = V to V  
CC  
CC  
Standby Current (CMOS)  
Partial Refresh Current  
Notes:  
I
SB1  
SS  
CC  
3/4 Block  
1/2 Block  
1/4 Block  
3/4 Block  
1/2 Block  
1/4 Block  
< 40°C  
< 85°C  
µA  
µA  
I
MRS# 0.2V, CS# V -0.2V Other inputs =  
V
SBP  
CC  
(note 1)  
to V  
SS CC  
1. Full Array Partial Refresh Current (ISBP) is same as Standby Current (ISB1).  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
114  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AC Operating Conditions  
Test Conditions (Test Load and Test Input/Output Reference)  
„ Input pulse level: 0.2 to V -0.2V  
CC  
„ Input rising and falling time: 3ns  
„ Input and output reference voltage: 0.5 x V  
„ Output load (See Figure 11.34): CL=50pF  
CC  
Vtt = 0.5 x V  
DDQ  
50  
Dout  
Z0=50  
30pF  
Figure 11.34. Output Load  
115  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Asynchronous AC Characteristics  
(V =1.7~2.0V, TA=-40 to 85 °C)  
CC  
Speed Bins  
Symbol  
tRC  
Parameter  
Read Cycle Time  
Min  
70  
25  
10  
5
Max  
Unit  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tPC  
Page Read Cycle Time  
tAA  
Address Access Time  
70  
tPA  
Page Access Time  
20  
tCO  
Chip Select to Output  
70  
tOE  
Output Enable to Valid Output  
UB#, LB# Access Time  
35  
tBA  
35  
tLZ  
Chip Select to Low-Z Output  
UB#, LB# Enable to Low-Z Output  
Output Enable to Low-Z Output  
Chip Disable to High-Z Output  
UB#, LB# Disable to High-Z Output  
Output Disable to High-Z Output  
Output Hold  
tBLZ  
tOLZ  
tCHZ  
tBHZ  
tOHZ  
tOH  
5
0
7
0
7
0
7
3
tWC  
tCW  
tADV  
tAS  
Write Cycle Time  
70  
60  
7
Chip Select to End of Write  
ADV# Minimum Low Pulse Width  
Address Set-up Time to Beginning of Write  
Address Set-up Time to ADV# Falling  
Address Hold Time from ADV# Rising  
0
tAS(A)  
tAH(A)  
tCSS(A)  
tAW  
0
7
CS# Setup Time to ADV# Rising  
Address Valid to End of Write  
UB#, LB# Valid to End of Write  
Write Pulse Width  
10  
60  
60  
tBW  
tWP  
55 (Note 1)  
tWHP  
tWR  
tWLRL  
tDW  
WE# High Pulse Width  
5 ns  
0
Latency-1 clock  
Write Recovery Time  
ns  
clock  
ns  
ns  
WE# Low to Read Latency  
Data to Write Time Overlap  
Data Hold from Write Time  
1
30  
0
tDH  
Notes:  
1. tWP (min)=70ns for continuous write operation over 50 times.  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
116  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Timing Diagrams  
Asynchronous Read Timing Waveform  
MRS# = V , WE# = V , WAIT# = High-Z  
IH  
IH  
tRC  
Address  
tAA  
tOH  
tCO  
CS#  
tCHZ  
tBA  
UB#, LB#  
tBHZ  
tOE  
OE#  
t
OLZ  
tLBZLZ  
tOHZ  
t
Data out  
High-Z  
Data Valid  
Figure 11.35. Timing Waveform Of Asynchronous Read Cycle  
Notes:  
1. tCHZ and tOHZ are defined as the time at which the outputs achieve the open circuit conditions and are not referenced to  
output voltage levels.  
2. At any given temperature and voltage condition, tCHZ(Max.) is less than tLZ(Min.) both for a given device and from device to  
device interconnection.  
3. In asynchronous read cycle, Clock, ADV# and WAIT# signals are ignored.  
Table 11.17. Asynchronous Read AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
tRC  
Min  
70  
3
Max  
Units  
Symbol  
tOLZ  
tBLZ  
Min  
5
Max  
7
Units  
tAA  
70  
70  
35  
35  
5
tCO  
tLZ  
10  
0
ns  
ns  
tBA  
tCHZ  
tBHZ  
tOHZ  
tOE  
0
7
tOH  
0
7
117  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Page Read  
MRS# = V , WE# = V , WAIT# = High-Z  
IH  
IH  
t
RC  
Valid  
Address  
A22~A2  
A1~A0  
tOH  
t
AA  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
Address  
Address Address Address  
tPC  
tCO  
CS#  
tBA  
UB#, LB#  
tBHZ  
tOE  
OE#  
t
CHZ  
t
tBOLZLZ  
t
OHZ  
t
PA  
t
LZ  
Data  
Valid  
Data  
Valid  
Data  
Valid  
Data  
Valid  
Data out  
High Z  
Figure 11.36. Timing Waveform Of Page Read Cycle  
Notes:  
1. tCHZ and tOHZ are defined as the time at which the outputs achieve the open circuit conditions and are not referenced to  
output voltage levels.  
2. At any given temperature and voltage condition, tCHZ(Max.) is less than tLZ(Min.) both for a given device and from device to  
device interconnection.  
3. In asynchronous 4 page read cycle, Clock, ADV# and WAIT# signals are ignored.  
Table 11.18. Asynchronous Page Read AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
tRC  
Min  
70  
Max  
Units  
Symbol  
tOH  
Min  
3
Max  
7
Units  
tAA  
70  
tOLZ  
tBLZ  
tLZ  
5
tPC  
25  
5
tPA  
20  
70  
35  
35  
ns  
10  
0
ns  
tCO  
tCHZ  
tBHZ  
tOHZ  
tBA  
0
7
tOE  
0
7
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
118  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Asynchronous Write Timing Waveform  
Asynchronous Write Cycle - WE# Controlled  
tWC  
Address  
tWR  
tCW  
CS#  
tAW  
t
BW  
UB#, LB#  
WE#  
tWP  
tAS  
tDW  
tDH  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Data in  
Data out  
Data Valid  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Figure 11.37. Timing Waveform Of Write Cycle  
Notes:  
1. A write occurs during the overlap (tWP) of low CS# and low WE#. A write begins when CS# goes low and WE# goes low with  
asserting UB# or LB# for single byte operation or simultaneously asserting UB# and LB# for double byte operation. A write  
ends at the earliest transition when CS# goes high or WE# goes high. The tWP is measured from the beginning of write to the  
end of write.  
2. tCW is measured from the CS# going low to the end of write.  
3. tAS is measured from the address valid to the beginning of write.  
4. tWR is measured from the end of write to the address change. tWR is applied in case a write ends with CS# or WE# going  
high.  
5. In asynchronous write cycle, Clock, ADV# and WAIT# signals are ignored.  
Table 11.19. Asynchronous Write AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
tWC  
Min  
Max  
Units  
Symbol  
tAS  
Min  
0
Max  
Units  
70  
tCW  
60  
60  
tWR  
0
ns  
tAW  
ns  
tDW  
30  
0
tBW  
60  
tDH  
tWP  
55 (note 1)  
Notes:  
1.  
tWP(min) = 70ns for continuous write operation over 50 times.  
119  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Write Cycle 2  
MRS# = V , OE# = V , WAIT# = High-Z, UB# & LB# Controlled  
IH  
IH  
tWC  
Address  
tWR  
tCW  
CS#  
tAW  
tBW  
UB#, LB#  
tAS  
tWP  
WE#  
tDH  
tDW  
Data Valid  
Data in  
Data out  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Figure 11.38. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle(2)  
Notes:  
1. A write occurs during the overlap (tWP) of low CS# and low WE#. A write begins when CS# goes low and WE# goes low with  
asserting UB# or LB# for single byte operation or simultaneously asserting UB# and LB# for double byte operation. A write  
ends at the earliest transition when CS# goes high or WE# goes high. The tWP is measured from the beginning of write to the  
end of write.  
2. tCW is measured from the CS# going low to the end of write.  
3. tAS is measured from the address valid to the beginning of write.  
4. tWR is measured from the end of write to the address change. tWR is applied in case a write ends with CS# or WE# going  
high.  
5. In asynchronous write cycle, Clock, ADV# and WAIT# signals are ignored.  
Table 11.20. Asynchronous Write AC Characteristics (UB# & LB# Controlled)  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
tWC  
Min  
Max  
Units  
Symbol  
tAS  
Min  
0
Max  
Units  
70  
tCW  
60  
60  
tWR  
0
ns  
tAW  
ns  
tDW  
30  
0
tBW  
60  
tDH  
tWP  
55 (note 1)  
Notes:  
1. tWP(min) = 70ns for continuous write operation over 50 times.  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
120  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Write Cycle (Address Latch Type)  
MRS# = V , OE# = V , WAIT# = High-Z, WE# Controlled  
IH  
IH  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
CLK  
tADV  
ADV#  
tAS(A)  
tAH(A)  
Address  
Valid  
tCSS(A)  
tCW  
CS#  
t
tBW  
AW  
UB#, LB#  
tWLRL  
tWP  
WE#  
tAS  
tDW  
tDH  
Data in  
Data Valid  
Read Latency5  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Data out  
Figure 11.39. Timing Waveform Of Write Cycle (Address Latch Type)  
Notes:  
1. A write occurs during the overlap (tWP) of low CS# and low WE#. A write begins when CS# goes low and WE# goes low with  
asserting UB# or LB# for single byte operation or simultaneously asserting UB# and LB# for word operation. A write ends at  
the earliest transition when CS# goes high or WE# goes high. The tWP is measured from the beginning of write to the end of  
write.  
2.  
t
AW is measured from the address valid to the end of write. In this address latch type write timing, tWC is same as tAW  
.
3. tCW is measured from the CS# going low to the end of write.  
4. tBW is measured from the UB# and LB# going low to the end of write.  
5. Clock input does not have any affect to the write operation if the parameter tWLRL is met.  
Table 11.21. Asynchronous Write in Synchronous Mode AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
tADV  
Min  
7
Max  
Units  
Symbol  
tBW  
Min  
Max  
Units  
ns  
60  
tAS(A)  
tAH(A)  
tCSS(A)  
tCW  
0
tWP  
55 (note 2)  
7
tWLRL  
tAS  
1
0
clock  
ns  
10  
60  
60  
tDW  
30  
0
ns  
tAW  
tDH  
Notes:  
1. Address Latch Type, WE# Controlled.  
2. tWP(min) = 70ns for continuous write operation over 50 times.  
121  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Asynchronous Write Timing Waveform in Synchronous Mode  
Write Cycle (Low ADV# Type)  
MRS# = V , OE# = V , WAIT# = High-Z, WE# Controlled  
IH  
IH  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
CLK  
ADV#  
tWC  
Address  
tWR  
tCW  
tAW  
CS#  
tBW  
UB#, LB#  
tWLRL  
tWP  
WE#  
tAS  
tDH  
tDW  
Data in  
Data Valid  
Read Latency 5  
High-Z  
Data out  
High-Z  
Figure 11.40. Timing Waveform Of Write Cycle (Low ADV# Type)  
Notes:  
1. Low ADV# type write cycle - WE# Controlled.  
2. A write occurs during the overlap (tWP) of low CS# and low WE#. A write begins when CS# goes low and WE# goes low with  
asserting UB# or LB# for single byte operation or simultaneously asserting UB# and LB# for double byte operation. A write  
ends at the earliest transition when CS# goes high or WE# goes high. The tWP is measured from the beginning of write to the  
end of write.  
3. tCW is measured from the CS# going low to the end of write.  
4. tAS is measured from the address valid to the beginning of write.  
5. tWR is measured from the end of write to the address change. tWR is applied in case a write ends with CS# or WE# going  
high.  
6. Clock input does not have any affect to the write operation if the parameter tWLRL is met.  
Table 11.22. Asynchronous Write in Synchronous Mode AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
tWC  
Min  
Max  
Units  
Symbol  
tWLRL  
tAS  
Min  
1
Max  
Units  
70  
clock  
tCW  
60  
60  
0
tAW  
ns  
tWR  
0
ns  
tBW  
60  
tDW  
30  
0
tWP  
55 (note 2)  
tDH  
Notes:  
1. Low ADV# Type, WE# Controlled.  
2. WP(min) = 70ns for continuous write operation over 50 times.  
t
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
122  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Write Cycle (Low ADV# Type)  
MRS# = V , OE# = V , WAIT# = High-Z, UB# & LB# Controlled  
IH  
IH  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
CLK  
ADV#  
tWC  
Address  
CS#  
tWR  
tCW  
t
AW  
tBW  
UB#, LB#  
WE#  
tAS  
tWLRL  
tWP  
tDH  
tDW  
Data Valid  
Data in  
Read Latency 5  
High-Z  
Data out  
High-Z  
Figure 11.41. Timing Waveform Of Write Cycle (Low ADV# Type)  
Notes:  
1. Low ADV# type write cycle - UB# and LB# Controlled.  
2. A write occurs during the overlap (tWP) of low CS# and low WE#. A write begins when CS# goes low and WE# goes low with  
asserting UB# or LB# for single byte operation or simultaneously asserting UB# and LB# for double byte operation. A write  
ends at the earliest transition when CS# goes high or WE# goes high. The tWP is measured from the beginning of write to the  
end of write.  
3. tCW is measured from the CS# going low to the end of write.  
4. tAS is measured from the address valid to the beginning of write.  
5. tWR is measured from the end of write to the address change. tWR is applied in case a write ends with CS# or WE# going  
high.  
6. Clock input does not have any affect to the write operation if the parameter tWLRL is met.  
Table 11.23. Asynchronous Write in Synchronous Mode AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
tWC  
Min  
Max  
Units  
Symbol  
tWLRL  
tAS  
Min  
1
Max  
Units  
70  
clock  
tCW  
60  
60  
0
tAW  
ns  
tWR  
0
ns  
tBW  
60  
tDW  
30  
0
tWP  
55 (note 2)  
tDH  
Notes:  
1. Low ADV# type multiple write, UB#, LB# controlled.  
2. tWP(min) = 70ns for continuous write operation over 50 times.  
123  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Multiple Write Cycle (Low ADV# Type)  
MRSE = V , OE# = V , WAIT# = High-Z, WE# Controlled  
IH  
IH  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
CLK  
ADV#  
Address  
tWC  
tWC  
tWR  
tWR  
t
AW  
tCW  
t
AW  
tCW  
CS#  
tBW  
tBW  
UB#, LB#  
tWHP  
tWP  
tWP  
WE#  
tAS  
tAS  
tDH  
tDH  
tDW  
tDW  
Data in  
Data Valid  
DataValid  
Data out  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Figure 11.42. Timing Waveform Of Multiple Write Cycle (Low ADV# Type)  
Notes:  
1. Low ADV# type multiple write cycle.  
2. A write occurs during the overlap (tWP) of low CS# and low WE#. A write begins when CS# goes low and WE# goes low with  
asserting UB# or LB# for single byte operation or simultaneously asserting UB# and LB# for double byte operation. A write  
ends at the earliest transition when CS# goes high or WE# goes high. The tWP is measured from the beginning of write to the  
end of write.  
3. tCW is measured from the CS# going low to the end of write.  
4. tAS is measured from the address valid to the beginning of write.  
5. tWR is measured from the end of write to the address change. tWR is applied in case a write ends with CS# or WE# going  
high.  
6. Clock input does not have any affect on the asynchronous multiple write operation if tWHP is shorter than the (Read Latency  
- 1) clock duration.  
7.  
tWP(min) = 70ns for continuous write operation over 50 times.  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
124  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 11.24. Asynchronous Write in Synchronous Mode AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Units  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
Max  
Min  
5ns  
0
Max  
t
t
t
t
70  
t
Latency-1 clock  
WC  
CW  
AW  
BW  
WHP  
60  
60  
t
AS  
ns  
t
0
WR  
DW  
ns  
60  
t
30  
0
t
55 (note 2)  
t
DH  
WP  
Notes:  
1. Low ADV# type multiple write, WE# Controlled.  
2.  
tWP(min) = 70ns for continuous write operation over 50 times.  
125  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
AC Operating Conditions  
Test Conditions (Test Load and Test Input/Output Reference)  
„ Input pulse level: 0.2 to V -0.2V  
CC  
„ Input rising and falling time: 3ns  
„ Input and output reference voltage: 0.5 x V  
„ Output load (See Figure 11.34): CL = 30pF  
CC  
Vtt = 0.5 x V  
DDQ  
50  
Dout  
Z0=50  
30pF  
Figure 11.43. AC Output Load Circuit  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
126  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 11.25. Synchronous AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Parameter List  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
15  
0
Max  
200  
2500  
Clock Cycle Time  
T
Burst Cycle Time  
t
BC  
Address Set-up Time to ADV# Falling (Burst)  
Address Hold Time from ADV# Rising (Burst)  
ADV# Setup Time  
t
t
AS(B)  
AH(B)  
7
t
t
5
ADVS  
ADVH  
ADV# Hold Time  
7
CS# Setup Time to Clock Rising (Burst)  
Burst End to New ADV# Falling  
Burst Stop to New ADV# Falling  
CS# Low Hold Time from Clock  
CS# High Pulse Width  
t
5
CSS(B)  
t
7
BEADV  
Burst Operation  
(Common)  
ns  
t
12  
7
BSADV  
t
CSLH  
CSHP  
ADHP  
t
t
55  
1
ADV# High Pulse Width  
Chip Select to WAIT# Low  
t
10  
10  
12  
7
WL  
ADV# Falling to WAIT# Low  
Clock to WAIT# High  
t
AWL  
t
WH  
WZ  
Chip De-select to WAIT# High-Z  
UB#, LB# Enable to End of Latency Clock  
Output Enable to End of Latency Clock  
UB#, LB# Valid to Low-Z Output  
Output Enable to Low-Z Output  
Latency Clock Rising Edge to Data Output  
Output Hold  
t
t
clock  
clock  
BEL  
OEL  
BLZ  
OLZ  
t
t
1
5
t
5
t
3
10  
CD  
OH  
Burst Read Operation  
t
ns  
Burst End Clock to Output High-Z  
Chip De-select to Output High-Z  
Output Disable to Output High-Z  
UB#, LB# Disable to Output High-Z  
t
10  
7
HZ  
t
CHZ  
OHZ  
t
7
t
7
BHZ  
WE# Set-up Time to Command Clock  
WE# Hold Time from Command Clock  
WE# High Pulse Width  
tWES  
tWEH  
tWHP  
tBS  
5
5
5
5
5
7
7
5
3
UB#, LB# Set-up Time to Clock  
UB#, LB# Hold Time from Clock  
Byte Masking Set-up Time to Clock  
Byte Masking Hold Time from Clock  
Data Set-up Time to Clock  
Burst Write Operation  
tBH  
ns  
tBMS  
tBMH  
tDS  
Data Hold Time from Clock  
tDHC  
Note: (VCC = 1.7~2.0V, TA=-40 to 85 °C, Maximum Main Clock Frequency = 66MHz.  
127  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Synchronous Burst Operation Timing Waveform  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4 (MRS# = V )  
IH  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
T
CLK  
tADVH  
tADVS  
ADV#  
tBEADV  
tBEADV  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
Address  
CS#  
Valid  
Dont Care  
Valid  
tCSS(B)  
tBC  
Undefined  
Data out  
Data in  
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D0  
Burst Command Clock  
Burst Read End Clock  
Burst Write End Clock  
Figure 11.44. Timing Waveform Of Basic Burst Operation  
Table 11.26. Burst Operation AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Min  
15  
5
Max  
200  
2500  
Units  
Symbol  
tAS(B)  
Min  
0
Max  
Units  
T
tBC  
tAH(B)  
7
ns  
ns  
tADVS  
tADVH  
tCSS(B)  
tBEADV  
5
7
7
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
128  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Synchronous Burst Read Timing Waveform  
Read Timings  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4, WP = Low enable (WE# = V , MRS# = V ). CS#  
IH  
IH  
Toggling Consecutive Burst Read  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
T
CLK  
t
ADVH  
ADVS  
t
ADV#  
tBEADV  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
Address  
CS#  
Valid  
Dont Care  
Valid  
t
CSHP  
tCSS(B)  
tBC  
tBHZ  
tBEL  
LB#, UB#  
OE#  
tBLZ  
tOHZ  
tOEL  
t
t
CHZ  
t
OLZ  
Latency 5  
tCD  
tOH  
HZ  
Undefined  
Data out  
WAIT#  
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3  
tWZ  
t
WL  
t
WH  
tWH  
tWL  
High-Z  
Figure 11.45. Timing Waveform of Burst Read Cycle (1)  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished. For the new burst operation, tBEADV  
should be met.  
2. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge).  
3. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
4. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
129  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 11.27. Burst Read AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
tCSHP  
tBEL  
Min  
5
Max  
Units  
Symbol  
tOHZ  
tBHZ  
tCD  
Min  
3
Max  
7
Units  
ns  
1
7
clock  
ns  
tOEL  
1
10  
10  
12  
7
tBLZ  
5
tOH  
ns  
tOLZ  
tHZ  
5
tWL  
10  
7
tWH  
tCHZ  
tWZ  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4, WP = Low enable (WE# = V , MRS# = V ).  
IH  
IH  
CS# Low Holding Consecutive Burst Read  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
T
CLK  
t
ADVH  
ADVS  
t
ADV#  
tBEADV  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
Address  
CS#  
Valid  
Dont Care  
Valid  
tCSS(B)  
tBC  
tBEL  
LB#, UB#  
OE#  
tBLZ  
tOEL  
t
OLZ  
Latency 5  
tCD  
tOH  
tHZ  
Undefined  
Data out  
WAIT#  
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3  
tAWL  
tWH  
t
WL  
t
WH  
High-Z  
Figure 11.46. Timing Waveform of Burst Read Cycle (2)  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished. For the new burst operation, tBEADV  
should be met.  
2. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge).  
3. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
4. The consecutive multiple burst read operation with holding CS# low is possible only through issuing a new ADV# and  
address.  
5. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
130  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 11.28. Burst Read AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
tBEL  
Min  
1
Max  
Units  
Symbol  
tCD  
Min  
3
Max  
10  
Units  
clock  
tOEL  
tBLZ  
tOLZ  
tHZ  
1
tOH  
5
tWL  
10  
10  
12  
ns  
5
ns  
tAWL  
tWH  
10  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4, WP = Low enable (WE# = V , MRS# = V ).  
IH  
IH  
Last data sustaining  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
T
CLK  
t
ADVH  
ADVS  
t
ADV#  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
Address  
CS#  
Valid  
Don’t Care  
tCSS(B)  
tBC  
tBEL  
LB#, UB#  
OE#  
tBLZ  
tOEL  
t
OLZ  
tOH  
tCD  
Latency 5  
Undefined  
Data out  
WAIT#  
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3  
t
WL  
t
WH  
High-Z  
Figure 11.47. Timing Waveform of Burst Read Cycle (3)  
Notes:  
1. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge).  
2. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
3. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
131  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 11.29. Burst Read AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
tBEL  
Min  
1
Max  
Units  
Symbol  
tCD  
Min  
3
Max  
10  
Units  
clock  
tOEL  
1
tOH  
ns  
tBLZ  
5
tWL  
10  
12  
ns  
tOLZ  
5
tAWL  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
132  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Write Timings  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4, WP = Low enable (OE# = V , MRS# = V ).  
IH  
IH  
CS# Toggling Consecutive Burst Write  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
T
CLK  
tADVH  
tADVS  
ADV#  
tBEADV  
tCSHP  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
Address  
CS#  
Valid  
Valid  
Don’t Care  
tBC  
tCSS(B)  
tBS  
tBMS  
tBH  
tBMH  
LB#, UB#  
WE#  
tWEH  
tWHP  
tWES  
tDS  
tDHC  
tDHC  
Latency 5  
tWH  
Latency 5  
tWH  
Data in  
WAIT#  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D0  
tWZ  
tWL  
tWL  
High-Z  
Figure 11.48. Timing Waveform of Burst Write Cycle (1)  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished. For the new burst operation, tBEADV  
should be met.  
2. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
3. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge)  
4. D2 is masked by UB# and LB#.  
5. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
133  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Table 11.30. Burst Write AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
tCSHP  
tBS  
Min  
5
Max  
Units  
Symbol  
tWHP  
tDS  
Min  
5
Max  
Units  
5
5
tBH  
5
tDHC  
tWL  
3
ns  
tBMS  
tBMH  
tWES  
tWEH  
7
ns  
10  
12  
7
7
tWH  
5
tWZ  
5
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
134  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4, WP = Low enable (OE# = V , MRS# = V ).  
IH  
IH  
CS# Low Holding Consecutive Burst Write  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
T
CLK  
ADV  
t
ADVH  
ADVS  
t
tBEADV  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
Address  
CS#  
Valid  
Valid  
Don’t Care  
t
CSS(B)  
tBC  
tBS  
tBMS  
tBH  
tBMH  
LB#, UB#  
WE#  
tWEH  
tWHP  
tWES  
tDS  
tDHC  
tDHC  
Latency 5  
Latency 5  
Data in  
WAIT#  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D0  
tWL  
tAWL  
tWH  
tWH  
High-Z  
Figure 11.49. Timing Waveform of Burst Write Cycle (2)  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished. For the new burst operation, tBEADV  
should be met.  
2. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
3. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge)  
4. D2 is masked by UB# and LB#.  
5. The consecutive multiple burst read operation with holding CS# low is possible only through issuing a new ADV# and  
address.  
6. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
Table 11.31. Burst Write AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Units  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
5
Max  
Min  
5
Max  
t
t
t
WHP  
BS  
5
t
5
BH  
DS  
t
7
t
3
BMS  
BMH  
WES  
WEH  
DHC  
ns  
ns  
t
t
7
t
10  
10  
12  
WL  
5
t
AWL  
t
5
t
WH  
135  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Synchronous Burst Read Stop Timing Waveform  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4, WP = Low enable (WE#= V , MRS# = V ).  
IH  
IH  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
T
CLK  
t
ADVH  
ADVS  
t
ADV#  
tBSADV  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
Address  
CS#  
Valid  
Don’t Care  
Valid  
tCSHP  
tCSS(B)  
tCSLH  
tBEL  
LB#, UB#  
OE#  
tBLZ  
tOEL  
t
OLZ  
tOH  
tCHZ  
tCD  
Latency 5  
Undefined  
Data  
DQ0  
DQ1  
tWZ  
t
WL  
tWL  
tWH  
High-Z  
High-Z  
WAIT#  
Figure 11.50. Timing Waveform of Burst Read Stop by CS#  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished.  
2. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge)  
3. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
4. The burst stop operation should not be repeated for over 2.5µs.  
Table 11.32. Burst Read Stop AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Units  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
12  
7
Max  
Min  
3
Max  
10  
t
t
BSADV  
CD  
t
t
ns  
t
CSLH  
CSHP  
OH  
5
t
7
CHZ  
ns  
t
1
t
10  
12  
7
BEL  
OEL  
BLZ  
WL  
WH  
WZ  
clock  
ns  
t
t
1
t
5
t
t
5
OLZ  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
136  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Synchronous Burst Write Stop Timing Waveform  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4, WP = Low enable (OE#= V , MRS# = V ).  
IH  
IH  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
T
CLK  
t
ADVH  
ADVS  
t
ADV#  
tBSADV  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
Don’t Care  
Address  
CS#  
Valid  
Valid  
tCSHP  
t
CSS(B)  
tCSLH  
tBS  
tBH  
LB#, UB#  
WE#  
tWHP  
t
WEH  
t
WES  
tDS  
tDHC  
Latency 5  
Latency 5  
Data in  
WAIT#  
D0  
D1  
D0  
D1  
D2  
tWZ  
t
WL  
t
WL  
tWH  
tWH  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Figure 11.51. Timing Waveform of Burst Write Stop by CS#  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished.  
2. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge)  
3. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
4. The burst stop operation should not be repeated for over 2.5µs.  
Table 11.33. Burst Write Stop AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Units  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
12  
7
Max  
Min  
5
Max  
t
t
WHP  
BSADV  
t
t
t
5
CSLH  
CSHP  
DS  
5
t
3
DHC  
ns  
t
5
t
10  
12  
7
ns  
BS  
WL  
WH  
WZ  
t
5
t
t
BH  
t
5
WES  
WEH  
t
5
137  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Synchronous Burst Read Suspend Timing Waveform  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4, WP = Low enable (WE#= V , MRS# = V ).  
IH  
IH  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
T
CLK  
t
ADVH  
ADVS  
t
ADV#  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
Address  
CS#  
Valid  
Dont Care  
tCSS(B)  
tBC  
tBEL  
LB#, UB#  
OE#  
tBLZ  
tOEL  
t
OLZ  
Latency 5  
tOHZ  
tOLZ  
tOH  
tCD  
tHZ  
High-Z  
Undefined  
Data out  
WAIT#  
DQ0 DQ1  
DQ1 DQ2 DQ3  
tWZ  
t
WL  
t
WH  
High-Z  
Figure 11.52. Timing Waveform of Burst Read Suspend Cycle (1)  
Notes:  
1. If the clock input is halted during burst read operation, the data output will be suspended. During the burst read suspend  
period, OE# high drives data output to high-Z. If the clock input is resumed, the suspended data will be output first.  
2. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge)  
3. During the suspend period, OE# high drives DQ to High-Z and OE# low drives DQ to Low-Z. If OE# stays low during suspend  
period, the previous data will be sustained.  
4. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
Table 11.34. Burst Read Suspend AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Units  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
1
Max  
Min  
Max  
10  
7
t
t
HZ  
BEL  
OEL  
BLZ  
OLZ  
clock  
t
t
1
t
OHZ  
5
t
10  
12  
7
WL  
WH  
WZ  
ns  
t
5
t
t
ns  
t
3
10  
CD  
OH  
t
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
138  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Transition Timing Waveform Between Read And Write  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4, WP = Low enable (MRS# = V ).  
IH  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21  
T
CLK  
tADVH  
tADVS  
ADV#  
tADV  
tAH(A)  
tBEADV  
tAS(A)  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
Valid  
Dont Care  
Valid  
Address  
CS#  
tCSS(B)  
tAW  
tCW  
tBC  
tCSS(A)  
tWLRL  
tWP  
WE#  
OE#  
tAS  
tOEL  
tBEL  
tBW  
LB#, UB#  
Data in  
tDH  
tDW  
Data Valid  
Latency 5  
High-Z  
tCD  
tOH  
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3  
tHZ  
High-Z  
Data out  
WAIT#  
tWL  
tWZ  
tWH  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Read Latency 5  
Figure 11.53. Synchronous Burst Read to Asynchronous Write (Address Latch Type)  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished. For the new burst operation, tBEADV  
should be met.  
2. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge)  
3. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
4. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
Table 11.35. Burst Read to Asynchronous Write (Address Latch Type) AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Units  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
t
7
ns  
t
1
clock  
BEADV  
WLRL  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4 (MRS# = V ).  
IH  
139  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
21  
T
CLK  
tADVH  
tADVS  
ADV#  
tBEADV  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
Address  
CS#  
Valid  
Don’t Care  
Valid Adderss  
tWR  
tAW  
tCW  
tCSS(B)  
tBC  
tWLRL  
tWP  
WE#  
OE#  
tAS  
tOEL  
tBEL  
tBW  
LB#, UB#  
Data in  
tDH  
tDW  
Data Valid  
Latency 5  
High-Z  
tCD  
tOH  
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3  
tHZ  
High-Z  
Data out  
WAIT#  
tWL  
tWZ  
tWH  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Read Latency 5  
Figure 11.54. Synchronous Burst Read to Asynchronous Write (Low ADV# Type)  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished. For the new burst operation, tBEADV  
should be met.  
2. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge)  
3. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
4. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
Table 11.36. Burst Read to Asynchronous Write (Low ADV# Type) AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Units  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
t
7
ns  
t
1
clock  
BEADV  
WLRL  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
140  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4 (MRS# = V ).  
IH  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
T
0
CLK  
tADVH  
tAH(B)  
tADVS  
ADV#  
tADV  
tAH(A)  
tAS(A)  
tAS(B)  
Address  
CS#  
Dont Care  
tAW  
tCW  
Dont Care  
tBC  
Valid  
Valid  
tCSS(A)  
tCSS(B)  
tWLRL  
tWP  
WE#  
OE#  
tAS  
tOEL  
tBEL  
tBW  
LB#, UB#  
Data in  
tDH  
tDW  
Data Valid  
Latency 5  
tCD  
tOH  
tHZ  
Data out  
High-Z  
Read Latency 5  
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3  
tWH  
tWL  
tWZ  
High-Z  
WAIT#  
Figure 11.55. Asynchronous Write (Address Latch Type) to Synchronous Burst Read Timing  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished. For the new burst operation, tBEADV  
should be met.  
2. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge)  
3. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
4. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
Table 11.37. Asynchronous Write (Address Latch Type) to Burst Read AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Units  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
t
1
clock  
WLRL  
141  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4 (MRS# = V ).  
IH  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
T
0
CLK  
tADVH  
tAH(B)  
tADtHAPDVS  
ADV#  
Address  
CS#  
tAS(B)  
tWC  
Valid  
Valid  
Dont Care  
tBC  
tAW  
tCW  
tWR  
tCSS(B)  
tWLRL  
tWP  
tBW  
WE#  
OE#  
tAS  
tOEL  
tBEL  
LB#, UB#  
Data in  
tDH  
tDW  
Data Valid  
Latency 5  
tCD  
tOH  
tHZ  
Data out  
High-Z  
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3  
tWH  
tWL  
tWZ  
High-Z  
Read Latency 5  
WAIT#  
Figure 11.56. Asynchronous Write (Low ADV# Type) to Synchronous Burst Read Timing  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished. For the new burst operation, tBEADV  
should be met.  
2. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge)  
3. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
4. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
Table 11.38. Asynchronous Write (Low ADV# Type) to Burst Read AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Units  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
t
1
clock  
t
ns  
WLRL  
ADHP  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
142  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4 (MRS# = V ).  
IH  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21  
T
CLK  
tADVH  
tADVS  
ADV#  
tBEADV  
tAH(B)  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
tAS(B)  
Valid  
Dont Care  
Valid  
Address  
CS#  
tCSS(B)  
tBC  
tBC  
tCSS(B)  
tWES  
tWEH  
WE#  
OE#  
tOEL  
tBEL  
tBS  
tBH  
LB#, UB#  
Data in  
tDS  
Latency 5  
tDHC  
tWZ  
D0 D1 D2 D3  
High-Z  
Latency 5  
High-Z  
tCD  
tOH  
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3  
tWZ  
tHZ  
High-Z  
Data out  
WAIT#  
tWH  
tWL  
tWH  
tWL  
High-Z  
Figure 11.57. Synchronous Burst Read to Synchronous Burst Write Timing  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished. For the new burst operation, tBEADV  
should be met.  
2. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge)  
3. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
4. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
Table 11.39. Asynchronous Write (Low ADV# Type) to Burst Read AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Units  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
t
7
ns  
BEADV  
143  
pSRAM Type 4  
pSRAM_Type04_17A0 July 30, 2004  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Latency = 5, Burst Length = 4 (MRS# = V ).  
IH  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21  
T
CLK  
tADVH  
tADVS  
ADV#  
tBEADV  
tAH(B)  
tAH(B)  
tAS(B)  
tAS(B)  
Valid  
Dont Care  
Valid  
Address  
CS#  
tCSS(B)  
tBC  
tBC  
tCSS(B)  
tWES  
tWEH  
WE#  
OE#  
tOEL  
tBS  
tBH  
tBEL  
LB#, UB#  
tDS  
Latency 5  
tDHC  
D0 D1 D2  
D3  
High-Z  
Data in  
Data out  
WAIT#  
Latency 5  
tCD  
tOH  
tHZ  
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3  
High-Z  
tWL  
tWH  
tWZ  
tWH  
tWL  
High-Z  
Figure 11.58. Synchronous Burst Write to Synchronous Burst Read Timing  
Notes:  
1. The new burst operation can be issued only after the previous burst operation is finished. For the new burst operation, tBEADV  
should be met.  
2. /WAIT Low (tWL or tAWL): Data not available (driven by CS# low going edge or ADV# low going edge)  
/WAIT High (tWH): Data available (driven by Latency-1 clock)  
/WAIT High-Z (tWZ): Data don’t care (driven by CS# high going edge)  
3. Multiple clock risings are allowed during low ADV# period. The burst operation starts from the first clock rising.  
4. Burst Cycle Time (tBC) should not be over 2.5µs.  
Table 11.40. Asynchronous Write (Low ADV# Type) to Burst Read AC Characteristics  
Speed  
Speed  
Symbol  
Units  
Symbol  
Units  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
t
7
ns  
BEADV  
July 30, 2004 pSRAM_Type04_17A0  
pSRAM Type 4  
144  
P r e l i m i n a r y  
Revision Summary  
Revision A0 (November 8, 2004)  
Initial release.  
Colophon  
The products described in this document are designed, developed and manufactured as contemplated for general use, including without limitation, ordinary  
industrial use, general office use, personal use, and household use, but are not designed, developed and manufactured as contemplated (1) for any use that  
includes fatal risks or dangers that, unless extremely high safety is secured, could have a serious effect to the public, and could lead directly to death, personal  
injury, severe physical damage or other loss (i.e., nuclear reaction control in nuclear facility, aircraft flight control, air traffic control, mass transport control,  
medical life support system, missile launch control in weapon system), or (2) for any use where chance of failure is intolerable (i.e., submersible repeater and  
artificial satellite). Please note that Spansion will not be liable to you and/or any third party for any claims or damages arising in connection with above-men-  
tioned uses of the products. Any semiconductor devices have an inherent chance of failure. You must protect against injury, damage or loss from such failures  
by incorporating safety design measures into your facility and equipment such as redundancy, fire protection, and prevention of over-current levels and other  
abnormal operating conditions. If any products described in this document represent goods or technologies subject to certain restrictions on export under  
the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law of Japan, the US Export Administration Regulations or the applicable laws of any other country, the prior au-  
thorization by the respective government entity will be required for export of those products.  
Trademarks and Notice  
The contents of this document are subject to change without notice. This document may contain information on a Spansion product under development by  
Spansion LLC. Spansion LLC reserves the right to change or discontinue work on any product without notice. The information in this document is provided  
as is without warranty or guarantee of any kind as to its accuracy, completeness, operability, fitness for particular purpose, merchantability, non-infringement  
of third-party rights, or any other warranty, express, implied, or statutory. Spansion LLC assumes no liability for any damages of any kind arising out of the  
use of the information in this document.  
Copyright © 2003-2004 Spansion LLC. All rights reserved. Spansion, the Spansion logo, MirrorBit, combinations thereof, and ExpressFlash are trademarks of Span-  
sion LLC. Other company and product names used in this publication are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective compa-  
nies.  
November 8, 2004 S71WS512/256Nx0_UT  
S71WS512Nx0/S71WS256Nx0  
146  

相关型号:

S71WS512ND0BFWE32

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS512ND0BFWE33

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS512ND0BFWE60

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS512ND0BFWE62

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS512ND0BFWE63

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS512ND0BFWE7

Memory Circuit, 32MX16, CMOS, PBGA84, 12 X 9 MM, 1.20 MM HEIGHT, LEAD FREE, FBGA-84
SPANSION

S71WS512ND0BFWE70

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS512ND0BFWE72

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS512ND0BFWE73

Stacked Multi-Chip Product (MCP)
SPANSION

S71WS512ND0BFWEH0

Memory Circuit, Flash+PSRAM, 32MX16, CMOS, PBGA84, 12 X 9 MM, 1.40 MM HEIGHT, LEAD FREE, FBGA-84
SPANSION

S71WS512ND0BFWEH2

Memory Circuit, Flash+PSRAM, 32MX16, CMOS, PBGA84, 12 X 9 MM, 1.40 MM HEIGHT, LEAD FREE, FBGA-84
SPANSION

S71WS512ND0BFWEH3

Memory Circuit, Flash+PSRAM, 32MX16, CMOS, PBGA84, 12 X 9 MM, 1.40 MM HEIGHT, LEAD FREE, FBGA-84
SPANSION